Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Equipment
for engineering
education
Engineering mechanics
and engineering design
gunt
Contents
Engineering mechanics
Welcome to GUNT and engineering design
In this catalogue, we present a comprehensive
overview of our innovative demonstration and
experimental units. Introduction 004
training and education of technical personnel 2 Engineering mechanics – strength of materials 076
in trade and industry
studies in engineering disciplines 3 Engineering mechanics – dynamics 142
Index 380
Imprint
© 2017 G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH. Any reuse, storage, duplication and repro-
duction of content – even in extracts – is prohibited without the written
approval of G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH. GUNT is a registered trademark.
This means GUNT products are protected, and subject to copyright.
No liability can be accepted for any misprints.
Subject to change without notice.
Image credits: GUNT Gerätebau GmbH, manufacturers’ photos, Shutterstock.
Design & typesetting: Profisatz.Graphics, Bianca Buhmann, Hamburg.
Printed on non-chlorinated, environmentally friendly paper.
002 003
Engineering mechanics and engineering design
gunt
Teaching and learning systems for the fields of engineering
mechanics, engineering design, and materials testing
Materials
science
Catalogue 1
Mechanics
Catalogue 1
Thermo
dynamics
Technological fundamentals
Catalogue 3
Electrical
engineering
Catalogue 2
Engineering skills
Measuring
methods
Catalogue 1
Process contr.
engineering
Catalogue 2+5c
Control
engineering
Catalogue 2
Computer
sciences
Design, standardisation Production Business studies, Improving the people’s quality of life
Catalogue 1 patents, law through the development and application
of technology.
Technical design
004 005
Engineering mechanics and engineering design
gunt
Teaching and learning systems for the fields of engineering
mechanics, engineering design, and materials testing
MACHIN
CS
NEMATIC
elements, engineering design, and materials testing. The follow- of these topics.
ing table is an excerpt from a typical curriculum of a technical KI
S
MICS,
AND KIN
Engineering mechanics
NA
ET
Statics Strength of materials Dynamics (kinematics Machine dynamics DY ICS
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 and kinetics) Chapter 4
Chapter 3 STATIC
S
• forces and moments, • stresses in: tension, • kinematics of a point, • vibrations in machines
axioms of statics pressure, thrust, and kinematics of a rigid body
• torsional vibrations
NG MECH
• planar force systems,
torsion
• kinetics of the mass point of drive systems, I
AN
GINEER
equilibrium conditions • buckling problems bending vibrations
• systems of mass points
• method of sections and • deformations, stresses
ICS
• body dynamics
internal forces: normal
• law of elasticity
force, shear force, and • vibrations
bending moment • energy methods
N
• beams, trusses, bridges, • principle of virtual work TH OF M
NG
E
members
• experimental stress and
AT
STR
• static and kinetic friction strain analysis
ERIALS
ERIALS T
T
Engineering design
MA
ES
EERING
TING
Engineering drawings & cutaway models Machine elements & assembly exercises IN
Chapter 5 Chapter 5
ENG
DE
SIGN
• development of spatial perception • elements of connecting technology
• three-dimensional display • bearings
• sectional view • transmission /conversion elements
NGS | CU
• design guidelines • assembly exercises WI
TA
RING DR
• cutaway models
WAY MOD
EE
Materials testing EL
S ENGIN
ELEMEN
LY
EXERCIS
• mechanical testing of materials • material fatigue, fatigue limit
NE
I ES
• tensile, pressure, bending, hardness, torsion tests • tribology MACH
• impact test • corrosion
006 007
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
Engineering
mechanics and engineering design
1 Engineering mechanics –
statics
WP 962
Beam on two supports: bending moment diagram 033
SE 110.50 Flyer
Forces and moments Cable under dead-weight 034 Course: Engineering mechanics 060
TM 110
Fundamentals of statics 016
TM 110.01
Supplementary set – inclined plane and friction 018 Forces in a truss Static and kinetic friction
TM 110.02 Basic knowledge Basic knowledge
Supplementary set – pulley blocks 019 Method of sections for plane trusses 036 Static and kinetic friction 068
SE 110.53 Equilibrium in a
single plane, statically determinate system 024
TM 121
Equilibrium of moments on pulleys 026 Bridges, beams, arches, cables
TM 122 SE 110.18
Equilibrium of moments on a differential pulley block 027 Forces on a suspension bridge 046
SE 110.12
Lines of influence on the Gerber beam 048
SE 110.17
Three-hinged arch 050
SE 110.16
Parabolic arch 052
008 009
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
Introduction
Engineering mechanics
The basic engineering discipline is engineering mechanics, which In conjunction with the basic fields of materials science and In universities, the discipline of engineering mechanics is usually divided
describes the motions of bodies and the forces associated with machine elements, engineering mechanics provides fundamen- into the following subdisciplines:
these motions. tal calculation methods for creating engineering designs. Con-
• engineering mechanics I, focusing on statics
sequently, engineering mechanics should be understood as a
Engineering mechanics investigates the equilibrium of forces
bridge between theoretical knowledge and practical implemen- • engineering mechanics II, focusing on strength of materials (elastostatics)
as well as the resulting components’ stresses and deforma-
tation, without which an understanding and comprehensive
tions. Based on characteristics such as strength, permissible • engineering mechanics III, focusing on kinematics and kinetics (dynamics)
analysis of complex technical systems would not be possible.
stresses, or deformations, a component is designed by com-
paring the applied stress with the capacity to withstand stress.
This requires that the stress on a component is less than its
capacity to withstand stresses.
Topics in engineering mechanics
Statics
Statics courses include elementary knowledge for analysing loads on mechanical systems. This knowledge forms the basis
General classification of the discipline of engineering mechanics for sizing and designing components and machine elements.
and placement in this catalogue
q
Engineering mechanics A
B C D E
Statics Dynamics
Distribution of forces using the example of Millau Viaduct
Forces in Forces and time in
resting bodies moving bodies
Strength of materials
Chapter 1
Strength of materials deals with the deformation of F
elastic systems under loads such as pressure, tension, A
bending, torsion, and shearing as well as calculating the
resulting stress states.
Rigid-body statics Strength of materials Kinematics Kinetics FA
Statics of rigid bodies Statics of deformable Motion effect of bodies Cause of the motion of Bending stress of a cantilever
bodies and systems bodies and systems beam using the example of a
Examination diving board
of forces Stresses and Path, velocity, and Forces, path, velocity,
deformations acceleration and acceleration
Dynamics (kinematics and kinetics) Machine dynamics
Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 3 Dynamics investigates moving systems. Kinematics deals Building on the fundamentals of engineering mechanics,
with motion sequences without enquiring into the cause of machine dynamics deals with the interaction between
motion. Kinetics looks at the motion of rigid bodies under dynamic forces and motion quantities in machines.
the action of forces.
Machine dynamics Oscillating and
Knowledge of dynamics φ rotating inertia
“
forces using
is applied to machines, plants,
Engineering mechanics the example of
and components a reciprocating
is the essential introduction
to the field of engineering, Chapter 4 piston pump
„
as it provides both: FS
learning content and FRTO
methodological training. FS
FOSC
Motion of rigid
bodies using
the example of
FG a hoist crane FU
010 011
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
Introduction
Basic knowledge
Statics
FG
Q
AH N N
M M Q
AV BV
Area force: Volume force:
affects only a specific area or is applied acts spatially distributed over the
as a compressive load (water pressure volume of a body (weight, magnetic
FG weight, q snow load, A and B support forces, index V vertical forces, index H horizontal forces,
on a dam, load of snow on a roof) and electrical forces) N normal force, Q shear force, M bending moment
Axioms of statics
F1 F2
F1 FR
2
F12
∑F=0 F21 F12 = F21
1
F4 F2
F3
012 013
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
Introduction
014 015
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces and moments
TM 110 TM 110
Fundamentals of statics Fundamentals of statics
Specification
1 force gauge, 2 pull rod, 3 weight with hanger, 4 pull-and-push rod, 5 lever rod, 6 slide fix- Technical data
ings, 7 free pulley, 8 torque disk, 9 pivot bearing, 10 torque disk with bearing, 11 pulley
Panel
• WxH: 600x700mm, 13kg
• line grid: 50mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
016 017
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces and moments
TM 110.01 TM 110.02
Supplementary set - inclined plane and friction Supplementary set - pulley blocks
• elastic deflection of a helical spring • setup and principle of pulley blocks with
(Hooke’s law) 4 pulleys and with 6 pulleys; differential
• dynamic friction as a function of the pulley block
normal force, contact area and sur- • principle of “simple machines”: force
face properties of the friction body transmission, lifting work and potential
• determination of the friction coefficient energy
• rolling friction
• forces on the inclined plane Specification
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
018 019
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces and moments
TM 110.03 TM 115
Supplementary set - gear wheels Forces in a crane jib
Rack Weights
• modulus: m=2mm • 1x 1N (hanger)
• length: L=300mm • 4x 1N
• 1x 5N
Description Description
Mounting rail anodised aluminium • 4x 10N
• mode of operation of single-stage The base element is an aluminium rail
• LxWxH: 760x30x30mm • vectoral handling of forces in a A bar of adjustable length and a chain
and multistage gears which can be mounted on the panel of planar central force system make up the crane jib, which is attached LxWxH: 600x200x670mm
TM 110 using clamping elements. LxWxH: 604x404x132mm (storage sys- by adjustable clamp elements to a re- Weight: approx. 15kg
Supplementary set TM 110.03 extends tem) TM 115 represents a planar central taining bar. Weights are applied to the LxWxH: 720x480x178mm (storage sys-
the scope of experiments which can be All parts are clearly laid out and well pro- Weight: approx. 12kg force system in which multiple forces crane jib. The occurring bar forces are tem)
performed with TM 110 with the issues tected on a storage system. The stor- act on a single point of application. indicated by integrated spring balances. Weight: approx. 10kg (storage system)
single-stage and multistage gear and age systems are stackable, providing for Scope of delivery Based on the example of a crane jib,
conversation of rotation into linear mo- space-saving storage. forces are determined graphically and Scope of delivery
tion. A rack is used to demonstrate the 1 supplementary set experimentally: resultant cable force,
conversation of rotation into linear mo- 1 storage system with foam inlay tensile force, compressive force. The dir- 1 experimental unit
tion and vice versa. 1 set of instructional material ections and magnitudes of the forces 2 spring balances
are determined graphically by way of a 1 set of weights
Order number 040.11003 force parallelogram. 1 storage system with foam inlay
1 set of instructional material
Order number 040.11500
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
020 021
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces and moments
FL 111 EM 049
Forces in a simple bar structure Equilibrium of moments on a two-arm lever
Specification Specification
Bars Weights
• fixed bar: L=440mm • 3x 1N (hanger)
• adjustable bar: L=440, 622, 762mm • 6x 5N
• 12x 1N
Angle between bars
• 60°-60°-60°/45°-90°-45° LxWxH: 600x300x410mm
• 30°-120°-30°/30°-30°-120° Weight: approx. 10kg
Storage system:
Dial gauge LxWxH: 200x70x40mm
• measuring range: 0…10mm LxWxH: 95x68x35mm
• graduation: 0,01mm
Description Description Scope of delivery
Weights
• resolution of forces in simple bar The bar forces occurring are measured • 1x 1N (hanger) • fundamentals of the equilibrium A vertical column carries the lever. A 1 experimental unit
structures by the deformation of leaf spring • 1x 10N of moments and application of sturdy base plate ensures that the unit 1 set of weights
elements in the middle of the bar. • 2x 20N stands securely. 1 set of instructional material
the law of levers
FL 111 represents a simple bar struc- Order number 049.04900
ture. In the single plane system the bars Leaf spring element
EM 049 is used to investigate the funda-
are only subjected to compression and • force measuring range: 0…50N
mentals of the equilibrium of moments
tension. Loads are applied only to the based on the example of a two-arm
nodes. LxWxH: 900x200x600mm lever. Moments occurring on the lever
Weight: approx. 15kg are to be brought to equilibrium.
The unit comprises three bars that are LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage
joined together using disks such that the system) A centrally mounted beam represents a
joints are free to move. A longi-tudinally two-arm lever. Movable riders are
adjustable bar permits the bar structure Scope of delivery placed on the lever and weights are ap-
to be constructed with different angles. plied. Equilibrium is attained by moving
The bars engage in the disks by snap- 1 frame the weights. Distances from the pivot
locks. Two of the node disks also form 3 bars point – the lever arms – can be read
the supports (fixed and movable) and 3 node disks from an integrated scale. The calculation
are clamped to the sturdy aluminium 3 dial gauges of the lever arms is verified in the experi-
section base frame. The external load is 1 set of weights ment.
applied to the upper nodal point by 1 storage system with foam inlay
means of weights.
1 set of instructional material
Order number 021.11100
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
022 023
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces and moments
SE 110.53 SE 110.53
Equilibrium in a single plane, statically determinate system Equilibrium in a single plane, statically determinate system
Specification
Technical data
Ladder
1 support (movable support), 2 clamp weight, 3 ladder, 4 clamp guide pulley, 5 support • length: 650mm
(fixed support), 6 cable, 7 weight, 8 SE 112 mounting frame
• weight: 2N
• built-in rule, graduation: 1mm
Weights
• 3x 1N (hanger)
The picture shows SE 110.53 in the frame SE 112. • 9x 5N
• 12x 1N
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
024 025
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces and moments
TM 121 TM 122
Equilibrium of moments on pulleys Equilibrium of moments on a differential pulley block
Specification Specification
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
026 027
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
Internal reactions and methods of section
Basic knowledge
Internal reactions and methods of sections
for bars, beams and cables
The support structures are composed of different structural elements /plane-supporting structures (plates, disks and Free-body diagrams are the main method to represent the the load-bearing capacity of materials as a measure of their
supporting elements. The supporting elements are divided into frames) and one-dimensional supporting elements /linear internal force states in bars, beams and cables. For beam-struc- strength. When designing components, the internal forces
one-dimensional (bar or beam), two-dimensional (plate or disk) structures (beams, bars, arches and cables) are considered. tures in particular, free-body diagrams are used to charac- provide the designer with the crucial indicators for necessary
and three-dimensional elements (solid-supporting structure). In this chapter, we look at one-dimensional supporting struc- terise the internal stress state and, consequently, are used dimensions or the type of load distribution.
tural elements. when dimensioning the beam. Considering the internal forces
To investigate internal reactions in components or mechan-
is a prerequisite for calculating deformation and investigating
ical systems, these are reduced to a few important proper-
ties through modelling. Geometric idealisation then eliminates
seemingly insignificant dimensions. Instead of three-dimen- Internal reactions
sional supporting elements, two-dimensional supporting
1. The studied bodies or mechanical systems are removed 2. All forces acting on the body or system are determined.
One-dimensional supporting elements from the environment through representation in the Especially where the body or the mechanical system
free-body diagram. under investigation is separated from adjacent bodies.
Since the internal forces change between the different
F F cross-sections, we plot their curves for a better overview.
A F F The shear force, normal force and bending moment are
F represented as areas.
F M
F 3. Unknown forces are calculated using the equilibrium
M
F F conditions.
A B F
B
F F
F1 F2 F1 F2
F F F M M Q
N N
Bar: A support element, flexibly Beam: Rectilinear supporting element that Cable: A support element that can only AH AH Q
mounted at both ends, which can transfer forces along its axis, transverse transfer tensile forces. A cable that is AV BV AV BV
can transfer tensile and com- to its axis and moments. Horizontal elements attached at two defined points is the
pressive forces along the bar are generally known as beams or girder and equivalent of a tension bar.
axis. Depending on whether a vertical elements are known as pillars or N(x)
bar transfers tensile or com- columns.
pressive forces, it is referred to
as a tension bar or a compres- x
sion bar. F forces, M bending moment, A, B support forces
Q(x)
Internal forces
Using notional sections, parts are cut out of the support struc- show the forces and moments within a component as a reaction x
ture, which is in equilibrium. To maintain equilibrium, the internal to the action of the external forces.
reactions, also known as section reactions or internal forces,
are entered into the sections. In statics, the internal reactions
x
028 029
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Internal reactions and methods of section
WP 960 WP 960
Beam on two supports: shear force & bending moment diagrams Beam on two supports: shear force & bending moment diagrams
Specification
Beam
• total length: 1000mm
• span: 800mm
Measuring ranges
• bending moment via force gauge and lever arm
· lever arm: 100mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments · force gauge: ±100N
· bending moment: ±10Nm
• application of the method of sec- The bending moment occurring at the • calculation of the reactions arising • shear force: ±50N
tions to determine internal reac- section is recorded by a second force from the static conditions of equilibri- • steel rule: 1000mm, graduation: 1mm
tions of the beam gauge acting on a fixed lever arm. This um
• direct indication of shear force force readout, divided by 10, gives the • application of the method of sections Weights
and bending moment at a section bending moment in Nm. Adjuster nuts to calculate the internal forces and mo- • 3x 1N (hanger)
on the two force gauges are used to ments • 12x 1N
on the beam
align the beam horizontally and balance · under a point load Internal forces on the beam under mid point load: • 9x 5N
out any deflection. · under multiple point loads F applied point load, FA /FB reactions (0,5F), Q shear force, M bending moment • max. weight per hanger: 20N
Statics observes the effect of forces on • calculation of the shear force diagram
a rigid body, ignoring any possible de- In evaluating the experiment it becomes • calculation of the bending moment dia-
formations which may occur in the pro- LxWxH: 1400x320x600mm
clear that the shear force, as opposed gram Weight: approx. 35kg
cess. The forces are in equilibrium. to the bending moment, is mostly negli- • comparison of calculated and meas- LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
gible when designing components. ured values for shear force and bend- Weight: approx. 12kg (storage system)
A simple example is a statically determ- ing moment
inate bearing-mounted beam subjected The various elements of the experiment
to point loads. The reactions are de- Scope of delivery
are clearly laid-out and housed securely
termined from the conditions of equilibri- in a storage system. The complete ex-
um. To investigate the effect of the point 1 experimental unit
perimental setup is arranged on a
loads in the beam, it is notionally split in- frame.
1 set of weights
to two segments. Applying the method 1 steel rule
of sections, the internal forces and mo- 1 storage system with foam inlay
ments are plotted onto the two seg- 1 set of instructional material
ments and calculated by way of condi-
tions of equilibrium. Order number 020.96000
WP 960 includes a beam mounted on Shear force and bending moment diagram on beam with mid point load:
line (orange): position of the hinge at which the internal forces of the beam are indicated
two supports. The beam is cut at one
point. At that point there is a low-friction
hinge with two degrees of freedom. Two
force gauges determine the internal re-
actions to the externally applied forces
at the section. The shear force is recor-
ded and displayed directly by a force
gauge.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
030 031
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Internal reactions and methods of section
WP 961 WP 962
Beam on two supports: shear force diagram Beam on two supports: bending moment diagram
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
032 033
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Internal reactions and methods of section
SE 110.50 SE 110.50
Cable under dead-weight Cable under dead-weight
Specification
Roller chain
• DIN 8187
• length: 2400mm
• weight: 0,95kg/m
Cross-arm
Description Learning objectives/experiments • axle base: 600…1000mm
• groove spacing: 50mm
• catenary of a free-hanging cable All the component elements of the ex- • determination of the catenary of a free-
under dead-weight periment are clearly laid-out and housed hanging cable Holder
securely in a storage system. The com- · under dead-weight only • adjustable height of chain wheel: 0…300mm
Free-hanging cables and ropes are often plete experimental setup is arranged in · with additional weights • hole spacing: 50mm
used to support a structure, such as the frame SE 112. · with a symmetrical setup (chain
stay cables. On suspension bridges they wheels at same height) Actual applied cable forces: F1 + F2 forces, L1 + L2 suspended chain length with dead- Measuring ranges
are the load-bearing element of the · with an unsymmetrical setup weight, P1 + P2 marker point on chain wheel, f sag
• horizontal: 0…1000mm
structure. In many calculations the influ- • measurement of the sag • vertical: 0…850mm
ence of the dead-weight of the cable can • comparison of calculated and meas- • graduation: 1mm
be ignored, because it is low compared ured values
to the other loads. In the case of over- Weights
head power lines, however, the dead- • 2x 1N (hanger)
weight of the cable is relevant to the • 8x 1N
design of the pylons. • 6x 5N
In SE 110.50 a free-hanging cable un- 1
der the influence of its own dead-weight LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
2 Weight: approx. 29kg (total)
is investigated. A roller chain serves as
the cable, and is mounted on two ball
bearing-supported chain wheels. The Scope of delivery
chain wheel units are fixed to a cross-
arm. The spacing between the chain 1 roller chain
wheel axles can be adjusted horizontally 1 cross-arm with clamp
and vertically. Weights can be attached 2 chain wheels with holders
Free-hanging cables in practice (portal): 1 stay cable, 2 power line, similar to overhead line
to both ends of the chain. The maximum 1 rule
sag is measured using scaled rules, and 1 set of weights
can be compared with calculated values. 1 storage system with foam inlay
The sag is the distance between the 1 set of instructional material
connecting line of the supports and the
catenary (see also illustration: “Actual Order number 022.11050
applied cable forces” on the next page).
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
034 035
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
Forces in a truss
Basic knowledge
Method of sections for plane trusses
L
45°
The support forces and bar forces
are calculated using various meth- S5
S3
ods of sections. S2 S3
L
S2 AH
A B
F S1
60° 49° 30° L L AV BV
B C
S1
L L L
S1 F AH F S5
S4
BV
S2 S3
A B AV S2 F
S2 S5
S2
S3 S3
30° S4
S1 C
S1
L S1 S1
F
F S5 AH
AH A 45°
S2 BV
S1 - S5 bar forces, S4
A+B support forces,
S bar forces, A+B support forces, C nodes, F force, AV S2
I- IV nodes, F force,
L bar length, S2 wanted bar force S3
AV index V vertical forces,
index H horizontal forces,
L length,
Ritter’s method of sections is used when only single bar forces
green: circumferential direction S1
need to be determined in a truss. Applying Ritter’s method
of sections requires that the supporting and external forces
S bar forces, A+B support forces, F forces, index V vertical forces,
are known. The section runs through three bars, of which two The Cremona diagram is a graphical method for determining
index H horizontal forces
bars are connected in a node. In the case of the equilibrium of bar forces in a truss. Applying the Cremona diagram requires
moments, it makes sense to choose the intersection of the that the support forces and the external forces are known or
Using the method of joints, all nodes are isolated in succession. The equilibrium conditions two bar forces as the reference point. Consequently, only one that they have been determined beforehand using the method
are established at each node. Applying the method of joints requires that no more than two unknown bar force remains in the equation. The advantage of of joints. Then a force diagram is systematically plotted for each
unknown forces are acting on the node. The advantage of this method is that no bar force this method is that it is possible to calculate individual bar forces node with a known force and two unknown forces. The direc-
is overlooked in complex trusses. without having to consider every node. tion of force is plotted in the entire force diagram of the truss.
The unknown bar forces can be derived from the triangle of
forces. The advantage of this method is that no bar force is
overlooked in complex trusses and all force directions are
correctly plotted.
Equilibrium ∑FV = 0 = -F + S2 sin 49°+ S3 sin 45°
condition
Equilibrium condition ∑ FV = 0 = AV + S1 sin 45° ∑FH = 0 = -S3 cos 30°- S1 - S2 cos 49°
∑ FH = 0 = S2 + S1 cos 45° + AH ∑MC = F · L - S2 · sin 49° · L = 0
036 037
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces in a truss
SE 110.21 SE 110.21
Forces in various single plane trusses Forces in various single plane trusses
Specification
Technical data
1 support, 2 load application device with force gauge, 3 node disk, 4 bar with measuring
point, 5 frame SE 112
Bars: 19
• 2 bars 150mm
• 5 bars 259mm
• 7 bars 300mm
• 1 bar 397mm
x • 3 bars 424mm
• 1 bar 520mm
• angle between bars: 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
The picture shows SE 110.21 in a frame similar to SE 112.
• maximum bar force: 500N
• measuring points on each bar
Description Learning objectives/experiments • height of truss max. 450mm
• length of truss max. 900mm
• measurement of the bar forces in Consequently, our trusses can be con- • measurement of the bar forces in vari-
a single plane truss sidered as ideal trusses. A load applica- ous single plane trusses Load application device
• construction of various truss tion device attached to a node disk gen- • dependency of the bar forces on the • ±500N
forms erates an external force. All the forces external force • graduation: 10N
• bars with strain gauge measure- on the truss bars are recorded by · magnitude
means of strain gauge measurement. · direction 3 truss forms LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
ment to measure bar force
Computerised evaluation of the meas- · point of application red: support reactions, black: external force Weight: approx. 26kg (total)
ured values is provided by measuring • comparison of measuring results with
As light-weight structures offering a high amplifier FL 152 (16 input channels). mathematical methods
degree of rigidity, trusses are employed Scope of delivery
The software in FL 152 is used to man- · method of joints
in the construction of halls, bridges, age the measured data and provide · Ritter’s method of sections
cranes, pylons and masts. Trusses are 1 set of bars
graphical representation of the bar • basic principle: measurement of forces 5 node disks
bar structures in which the bars are forces. The software features a compre- using strain gauge measurement
subjected to compression or tension 2 supports with node disk
hensive help function.
loading, but not to bending. 1 load application device
All the component elements of the ex- 1 set of cables
The object of the experiment is to meas- periment are clearly laid-out and housed 1 storage system with foam inlay
ure the bar forces in a single plane truss securely in a storage system. The com- 1 set of instructional material
subjected to a single external force. plete experimental setup is arranged in
Order number 022.11021
the frame SE 112.
The SE 110.21 experimental setup fea-
tures bars with special snap-lock clos-
ures on their ends allowing them to be
fixed easily into the node disk. The range
of different bar lengths provided permits Fixing of the bars in the node disk
three statically determinated truss to be
constructed.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
038 039
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces in a truss
SE 110.22 SE 110.22
Forces in an overdeterminate truss Forces in an overdeterminate truss
Specification
Technical data
1 support, 2 surplus bar (adjustable), 3 node disk, 4 bar with measuring point, 5 load applic-
ation device, 6 dial gauge with fixture, 7 frame SE 112
Bars: 8
• 5 bars, fixed 300mm
• 2 bars, fixed 424mm
• 1 bar, adjustable 400…450mm
• angle between bars: 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
x • maximum bar force: 500N
• measuring point on each bar
• height of truss max. 270mm
The picture shows SE 110.22 in a frame similar to SE 112.
• length of truss max. 500mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
040 041
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Forces in a truss
SE 130 SE 130
Forces in a Howe truss Forces in a Howe truss
Specification
Technical data
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
042 043
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt
Forces in a truss
SE 130.01
Truss beam: Warren girder
Data acquisition
and visualisation
Learning objectives/experiments
Technical data
Node disks: 8
Description
• ready assembled Warren truss The force in the bars is measured using LxWxH: approx. 800x300x15mm
• bars with strain gauge measure- strain gauge measurement. Owing to Weight: approx. 8kg
ment to measure bar force the symmetrical construction, only half
of the bars have measuring points on Scope of delivery
Warren truss beams are frequently them. All strain gauge connections are
housed together in the strain gauge box. 1 truss beam: Warren type
used on steel constructions.
1 strain gauge connection box
Experiments with the truss SE 130.01 1 ribbon cable
are mounted on the frame of the Order number 022.13001
SE 130 unit. The mechanical construc-
tion of the truss ensures that only
tensile or compressive forces are active
in the bars. The connection between the
bars by means of node disks is “hinged”.
So this can be described as an ideal
truss.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
044 045
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Bridges, beams, arches, cables
SE 110.18 SE 110.18
Forces on a suspension bridge Forces on a suspension bridge
Specification
Technical data
Suspension bridge
• span: approx. 1050mm
• supporting cable sag: approx. 325mm
The illustration shows SE 110.18 in the frame SE 112.
• number of supporting cables: 2
• shackles: 12, graduated lengths
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Stiff roadway, two-section with hinge, wood
• stiff or elastic roadway for the Two roadways with different stiffness • familiarisation with a suspension • LxWxH: 1000x70x10mm
suspension bridge are available: one stiff and one elastic bridge • dead-weight of roadway: 5,5N
• different load cases possible: roadway. The stiff roadway has a hinge · under dead-weight
point or distributed load in the middle. The hinge permits internal · under additional weight Elastic roadway, PVC
• catenary of a free-hanging cable moments in the roadway occurring in re- · under evenly distributed load • LxWxH: 1000x70x3mm
sponse to uneven loading to be visual- · under unevenly distributed point Substitute model for a suspension bridge: “suspended cable with uniformly distributed load” • dead-weight of roadway: 3N
ised – the roadway buckles. loads with free-body diagram (bottom); F cable force, q0 distributed load; f maximum sag, L span
Suspension bridges are among the old-
• calculation of the supporting cable Weights
est of all bridge designs. Their main sup-
The experimental setup without roadway force • 16x 1N (hanger)
porting element is a flexible cable. Since
deals with free-hanging cables. Cables • comparison between calculated and • 12x 1N (shackle)
cables are able to absorb high tensile
with different dead-weights are studied measured values of the supporting • 24x 1N
forces while themselves having little
by attaching additional point loads dir- cable force • 28x 5N
dead-weight, they enable wide-span sus-
ectly to the supporting cables. • observation of the effect of internal
pension bridges to be constructed. This
moments in the roadway under uneven
makes it possible to bridge longer dis- LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
The tensile forces in the supporting load
tances with no supporting pillars, such Weight: approx. 37kg (total)
cables are determined with the aid of · for a stiff roadway
as over wide gorges. The sag of suspen-
weights. The maximum sag is measured · for an elastic roadway
sion bridge supporting cables is parabol- Scope of delivery
using a scaled rule. The scaled rule is • determination of the catenary of a free-
ic in shape, as the weights are attached
fixed to a cross-arm. hanging cable
at relatively short, constant intervals by 2 supporting cables
way of vertical cables to the main sup- 1 set of shackles for roadways
All the component elements of the ex-
porting cables. 1 roadway, stiff
periment are clearly laid-out and housed
securely in a storage system. The com- 1 roadway, elastic
The experimental setup SE 110.18 rep-
plete experimental setup is arranged in 2 deflection rollers with fixture
resents a suspension bridge. The bridge Forces on a suspension bridge: red: tensile forces (acting in the supporting cables, the
consists of two parallel supporting
the frame SE 112.
hangers and the anchorages of the supporting cables), blue: compressive force (acting in
1 cross-arm with clamp
cables with a roadway suspended the pylons) 1 rule
between them. U-shaped hangers serve 1 set of weights
as vertical cables. They are attached to 1 storage system with foam inlay
the main supporting cables at regular in- 1 set of instructional material
tervals, and hold the roadway. Deflection
rollers act as pylons. The roadway acts Order number 022.11018
upon the supporting cables as a distrib-
uted load, and can be loaded by addition-
al weights.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
046 047
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Bridges, beams, arches, cables
SE 110.12 SE 110.12
Lines of influence on the Gerber beam Lines of influence on the Gerber beam
Specification
Technical data
1 suspended beam, 2 articulated support, 3 cantilever beam, 4 support with force gauge, Beam
5 weight, 6 moving load, 7 frame SE 112
• total length: 1220mm
• cantilever beam length: 503mm
• suspended beam length: 250mm
Weights
The illustration shows SE 110.12 in the frame SE 112. • 24x 5N
• 12x 1N
• moving load: 10+20N
Description Learning objectives/experiments
LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
• articulated beam with two canti- The cantilever beam supports are • familiarisation with a Gerber beam Weight: approx. 40kg (total)
lever beams and a suspended equipped with force gauges which indi- • application of the method of sections
beam as an example of a typical cate the support reactions. and the conditions of equilibrium to cal-
Scope of delivery
bridge culate the support forces for
• direct indication of reactions Single loads and a moving load are · point load
1 Gerber beam (2 cantilever beams + 1 suspen-
• lines of influence for different provided to place load on the beam. This · distributed load Top: simplified experimental setup (Gerber beam), bottom: free-body diagram: F applied
means the beam can be subjected to · moving load force, FA + FB reactions of the articulated supports, F1…F4 reactions of the supports with
ded beam)
load cases point or distributed loads, or to a moving • determination of the internal reactions force gauge, L1, L2, LA positions of the supports 4 supports with force gauge
load. The force gauges indicate the ef- under static load 1 moving load
Many bridges are executed as Gerber fect of a moving load directly in the sup- · shear force curve 1 set of weights
beams. Bridges are subjected to moving port reactions. The supports are mov- · bending moment diagram 1 storage system with foam inlay
loads. Consequently, it is important to able. • determination of the lines of influence 1 set of instructional material
take these moving loads into account in under moving load
the design process. To that end, the so- All the component elements of the ex- • comparison of the calculated and Order number 022.11012
called lines of influence are determined. periment are clearly laid-out and housed measured reactions for static and
Lines of influence describe static reac- securely in a storage system. The com- moving load
tions to a moving load, such as the in- plete experimental setup is arranged in
ternal reactions of the beam or support the frame SE 112.
reactions. The lines of influence are de-
termined by way of method of sections
and the conditions of equilibrium, in the
same way as the bending moment dia-
gram for a static load for example.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
048 049
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Bridges, beams, arches, cables
SE 110.17 SE 110.17
Three-hinged arch Three-hinged arch
Specification
1 weight, 2 long arch segment, 3 crown hinge, 4 short arch segment, 5 support, 6 moving Technical data
load, 7 deflection roller with fixture, 8 frame SE 112; red: cable, blue: springing line
Aluminium arches
• 2x long: 480mm, total arch length: 960mm
• 1x short: 230mm, total arch length: 710mm
• arch height: 250mm
Weights
The illustration shows SE 110.17 in the frame SE 112.
• 4x 1N (hanger)
• 36x 1N
• 16x 5N
Description Learning objectives/experiments • moving load: 10N+20N
• statically determinate three- SE 110.17 includes two long arch seg- • familiarisation with three-hinged LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
hinged arch ments and one short segment, of which arches (unsymmetrical and symmetric- Weight: approx. 56kg (total)
• symmetrical or unsymmetrical two at a time are connected by a hinged al)
arch joint producing a symmetrical or unsym- • application of the method of sections Scope of delivery
• various load cases: point load, dis- metrical three-hinged arch. The arch un- and the conditions of equilibrium to cal-
der investigation can be subjected to culate the support forces for Top: symmetrically loaded three-hinged arch, bottom: free-body diagram of the loaded arch 3 arch segments
tributed load, moving load
point, distributed or moving load. · point load, distributed load, moving 1 moving load
Weights compensate for the support re- load
Bridges are often constructed as three- 2 supports
actions of a abutment hinge, so enabling • investigation of the influence of the
hinged arches. This type of construction a comparison between calculated and load on the horizontal thrust in the sup- 1 set of weights with deflection rollers
is particularly suitable when compres- actual measured values. ports 2 storage systems with foam inlay
sion-proof building materials are avail- • determination of the lines of influence 1 set of instructional material
able. Horizontal thrust occurs in the All the component elements of the ex- for the supports under a moving load
arch at the supports. It permits much Order number 022.11017
periment are clearly laid-out and housed • comparison of the calculated and
lower bending moments in the arch than securely in a storage system. The com- measured support reactions for static
in the case of a beam on two supports plete experimental setup is arranged in and moving load
with the same span. A significant longit- the frame SE 112.
udinal compressive force is active in the
arch to produce this effect.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
050 051
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Bridges, beams, arches, cables
SE 110.16 SE 110.16
Parabolic arch Parabolic arch
Specification
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
052 053
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
Accessories
SE 110.21 FL 120
Forces in various single plane trusses Stress and strain analysis on a membrane
• touchscreen
SE 110.22 FL 130 operation
Forces in an overdeterminate truss Stress and strain analysis on a thin-walled cylinder • the measured
values are
displayed on the
unit or on a PC USB
054 055
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Accessories
FL 152 FL 152
Multi-channel measuring amplifier Multi-channel measuring amplifier
Specification
Amplifier
• number of input channels: 16
• 16 input channels for processing FL 152 is a multi-channel measuring • amplification and display of signals LxWxH: 230x200x120mm
of analogue strain gauge measur- amplifier which supplies the strain from strain gauge measuring points Weight: approx. 2kg
ing signals, easy connection by gauge bridge circuits with power and • processing of measured values on
multi-pin input port processes the received measuring sig- computer
Required for operation
• integrated software for evalu- nals. The measuring amplifier includes • evaluation of stress and strain analysis
16 input channels. The strain gauge experiments, in conjunction with: Application software for stress and strain analysis based on the example of the FL 120
ation of stress and strain analys- 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
measuring points are connected to as- FL 120, FL 130, FL 140 (stress and strain analysis on a membrane)
1 phase
is experiments (FL 120, FL 130, sociated balance potentiometers by a • evaluation of experiments relating to
FL 140) and experiments relating 68-pin multiport. forces in trusses, in conjunction with:
to forces in trusses (SE 130, Scope of delivery
SE 130, SE 110.21, SE 110.22
SE 110.21, SE 110.22) The multi-channel measuring amplifier is
1 multi-channel measuring amplifier
operated via touchscreen or via PC us-
Stresses and strains occurring in com- ing the supplied software. The measured 1 software CD
ponents are determined in experimental values can be read and saved on com- 1 USB cable
stress and strain analysis by measuring puter (using an application such as 1 instruction manual
strain. In industry, strain is often recor- MS Excel).
Order number 021.15200
ded by strain gauges. Since strain
gauges deliver only small analogue
measuring signals, the signals must be
amplified in measuring amplifiers. Then
they are converted into digital pulses
and displayed as measured strain.
These strains may also be evaluated and
processed on computer.
Example application: FL 152 in conjunction with FL 130 (stress and strain analysis on a thin-
walled cylinder)
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
056 057
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Accessories
SE 112 VORLAGE
Mounting frame Momentengleichgewicht am zweiarmigen Hebel
GUNT storage systems keep your lab tidy!
Specification Lerninhalte/Übungen
TM 110.02
Supplementary set –
pulley blocks
TM 110.03
Supplementary set –
gear wheels
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15 - 17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
058 059
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 Wir behalten uns das Recht vor, technische Änderungen ohne Ankündigung vorzunehmen. Seite 1/1 - 08.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
GUNT-Structure Line:
A course on engineering
mechanics
060 061
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
In GUNT, the term “structure” refers to a supporting structure The series of units offers a variety of opportunities to learn Experiments on statics
or a building structure. The term “line” refers to a GUNT series about common topics such as equilibrium conditions, forces and
of units. The GUNT-Structure Line is a series of units that has deformations or stability and buckling and to develop a more
been specially developed by GUNT to support teaching basic in-depth understanding.
SE 110.16 SE 110.50
engineering principles with practical exercises.
Parabolic arch Cable under
dead-weight
The GUNT-Structure Line offers the following advantages:
• meaningful compilation of experiment subjects • safe storage of small parts such as screws, adapters, or
tools in transparent boxes
• wide range of experiments: one frame is combined with
different add-on parts • stable mounting frame, easy to assemble and disassemble,
with rubber feet for secure standing
• easy to transport and space-saving storage of the add-on
parts thanks to stackable storage systems • easy-to-install add-on parts can be fitted at any point on the
frame using adjustable clamping levers
• orderliness when conducting experiments, thanks to individ-
ual parts being stored in clear foam inserts
SE 110.21
Forces in
various single
plane trusses
space-saving
storage
• easy mounting
• secure standing
• sturdy and versatile Experiments on strength of materials
frame
• form-fitting clamping
connection for the SE 110.44 SE 110.19
add-on parts Deformation Investigation of simple stability problems
of trusses
SE 110.47
Methods to
determine
the elastic
line
space-saving
storage
062 063
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
The GUNT-Structure Line allows you to build an extensive laboratory on the fundamentals of
engineering. In this way, the rather abstract contents of the lecture can be practically simulated Mechanical Frame, components and connecting elements are
and clearly represented through small-group experiments. This promotes students’ long-term combined into a functioning experimental setup. The
learning success. Meanwhile, group participants’ social skills are encouraged in addition to their experimental setup
points of action for loads, their effect on the support
more technical skills. structures and structural elements and the use of
fixed and movable supports are tested.
This makes the function and the processes in sup-
port systems easy to observe and understand and it
ensures a lasting learning experience.
• implementing theoretical teaching subjects • Terms such as stability and balance of SE100.04 Experiment Set Plane Frame with Strain Gauges
Unit-specific,
gunt
• The load on the experimental setups, GUNT software Trusses can be simulated and configured in the
and stresses
mainly from weights, gives students a software. Similarly, the behaviour of truss sys-
feeling for masses and forces. tems is reflected in concrete measured values and
the bar forces are graphically displayed (SE 110.21,
SE 110.22).
• evaluating results • Measuring the deformation using dial
gauges provides direct feedback of the
• estimating errors
load. The factors of slack, friction and
the resulting hysteresis – which are
almost always present in real systems –
can be experienced.
064 065
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
066 067
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
Static and kinetic friction
Basic knowledge
Static and kinetic friction
While in statics, we study idealised bodies excluding frictional forces, in the study of static and kinetic friction, we investigate real
Static friction Dynamic friction
solid bodies. Friction occurs in all solid bodies that are in contact and that are moved against each other. The cause of the occurring
forces is, among other things, the surface roughness, which causes the surfaces to interlock.
Static friction is present if displacing forces are acting Dynamic friction occurs when a body moves along another
on both bodies, but the bodies have not started to move and in contact with it, i.e. it actually rubs against it. Dynamic
relative to each other yet. This is why we also talk about friction increases with the roughnesses of the bodies’ sur-
static friction that has to be overcome if we want to move faces and the pressure applied between the bodies. The
FG
a body. Static friction is a reaction force; in statically dynamic friction force is a physical force (active force) and
determinate systems, it can be determined from the proportional to the normal force FN.
equilibrium conditions.
F
v=0 v≠0
FR
FG FG
FN F ≤ FR F > FR
F F
Top two solid bodies, both with high surface roughness; bottom FG weight, FR frictional force, FN normal force, F external force,
one solid body with high surface roughness and one body with for example tensile force
low surface roughness
FN FH FN FR
Coulomb’s law of friction Typical values for the coefficient of friction μ
states that the frictional
force is proportional to
Materials pairing Coefficient of friction μ The body adheres to its under-layer The body slides over its underlayer
the normal force.
FG weight, FH force of static friction, FN normal force, FG weight, FR force of dynamic friction, FN normal force,
The proportionality F external force, v velocity F external force, v velocity
steel on steel 0,1 bis 0,4
factor μ depends on the
materials pairing of the
bodies and is called the steel on teflon 0,04
coefficient of friction. F ≤ FHmax FHmax = μ S · FN F > FR FR = μ K · FN
FR = μ · FN aluminium on aluminium 1,1 bis 1,7
FHmax maximum force of static friction, μS coefficient of static FR force of dynamic friction, μK coefficient of dynamic friction,
wood on wood 0,3 friction, FN normal force, F external force FN normal force, F external force
Friction
Dry friction
Fluid friction
Coulomb’s friction
068 069
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Static and kinetic friction
TM 210 TM 210
Dry friction Dry friction
Specification
Technical data
gunt gunt
Static and kinetic friction
TM 200 TM 225
Fundamentals of mechanical friction Friction on the inclined plane
1 experimental unit
1 set of weights
2 friction bodies
2 supporting friction surfaces
1 storage system with foam inlay
1 set of instructional material
Order number 040.20000
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
072 073
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
1 gunt
Engineering mechanics – statics
gunt gunt
Static and kinetic friction
TM 220 TM 220
Belt drive and belt friction Belt drive and belt friction
Technical data
Flat belts
• 1x leather/polyamide, 15x2,2mm, Extremultus LT10
1 support column, 2 pulley, 3 crank handle, 4 spring balance, 5 belt tension adjustment, • 1x polyamide, 15x0,6mm, Extremultus TT2
6 pivoting belt holder
V-belt
• ISO 4184
• profile: SPZ
• 9,7x8,0mm, rubber/fabric
Cable
• hemp, D=3mm
Pulley
• D=300mm
• material: grey iron
LxWxH: 700x350x1100mm
Weight: approx. 47kg
Gradual adjustment of the wrap angle from 30° to 180°.
Diagram shows the force ratio F1 / F2 as a function of the wrap angle α.
Scope of delivery
Description 1 experimental unit
2 flat belts
• function of a belt drive Cable friction arises due to tangential Two spring balances detect the tensile
static-friction forces at the points where forces on the respective belt ends. This
1 cable
• friction of different belt types on
the cable is in contact with the wheel or makes it possible to precisely adjust the 1 V-belt
a metal pulley
the pulley. Eytelwein’s cable friction for- belt tension using a threaded spindle. 2 dynamometers
mula is used to calculate both cable and 1 set of instructional material
The belt drives are machine elements
that are classed as traction mechan- belt friction. Two flat belts made of different materi-
Order number 040.22000
isms in the field of transmission or con- als, a V-belt and a cable belong to the
version elements. They transfer torque The TM 220 experimental unit allows scope of delivery. The experiments com-
and speed between guiding members the study by experiment of belt drives pare different belt types and materials
such as wheels or pulleys. The motion is and belt friction. At the core of the ex- and investigate the effect of the wrap
transferred by traction mechanisms perimental unit is a cast iron pulley, angle.
that can only absorb tensile forces. whose circumference features grooves
Toothed belts and chains deliver positive for V-belts and flat belts. The pulley is In addition, for V-belts, it is possible to
transmission of movements. Traction mounted on ball bearings and is study how the groove shape affects the Comparison of different belt types: 1 flat belt, 2 cable, 3 V-belt, 4 adverse belt seat in the
mechanisms such as cables, flat belts powered by a crank handle. Its flywheel coefficient of friction. groove, 5 optimum belt seat in the groove
and V-belts, on the contrary, allow for mass favours an even rotation of the pul-
non-positive transmission. ley. The belts rub on the pulley at a wrap
angle between 30° and 180°. The wrap
In non-positive belt drives, the circumfer- angle can be adjusted in increments
ential force between the belt and the of 15°.
pulley is transmitted according to the
principle of cable friction.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
074 075
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
Engineering
mechanics and engineering design
2 Engineering mechanics –
strength of materials
SE 110.47
Methods to determine the elastic line 086 Experimental stress and strain analysis
SE 110.29 Overview Experimental stress and strain analysis:
Torsion of bars 088 Strain gauge and photoelasticity 118
WP 100 FL 101
Deformation of bars under bending or torsion 090 Strain gauge application set 120
SE 110.20 FL 100
Deformation of frames 092 Strain gauge training system 122
FL 170 FL 102
Deformation of curved-axis beams 094 Determining the gauge factor of strain gauges 124
TM 262 FL 152
Hertzian pressure 098 Multi-channel measuring amplifier 128
TM 400 FL 120
Hooke’s law 100 Stress and strain analysis on a membrane 130
FL 130
Stress and strain analysis on a thin-walled cylinder 132
FL 140
Accessories Stress and strain analysis on a thick-walled cylinder 134
FL 210
Photoelastic demonstration 138
Basic knowledge
Stability problem: buckling 102
SE 110.19
Investigation of simple stability problems 104
SE 110.57
Buckling of bars 106
WP 121
Demonstration of Euler buckling 108
WP 120
Buckling behaviour of bars 110
Overview
Accessories for WP 120 112
076 077
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
Introduction
Strength of materials
Strength of materials is based on statics. The idealisation of a Strength of materials deals with the effect of forces on deform- Elastic deformation, law of elasticity
real body as a rigid body in statics allows determining the exter- able bodies. In addition, material-dependent parameters should
Machines and components elastically deform under the action mation of solids when this deformation is proportional to the
nal and internal forces on structures under equilibrium. Ensur- be considered as well. An introduction to the strength of mate-
of forces. While the load is not large enough, purely elastic defor- applied force.
ing equilibrium is not sufficient for calculating the mechanical rials is, therefore, given by the concept of stress and strain and
mation remains. The law of elasticity describes the elastic defor-
behaviour of components, including strength, rigidity, stability, by Hooke’s law, which is applied to tension, pressure, torsion and
fatigue strength and ductility, in the real world of engineering bending problems.
Energy methods
practice. Knowledge of the deformability of material bodies is
required, without consideration of the material. Geometric considerations play a subordinate role in the energy Different energy methods are used to calculate general systems
methods. Instead of the previously used equilibrium conditions, and to investigate the stability of elastic structures, such as the
we investigate how much work is produced by external forces principle of virtual displacement, the principle of virtual forces,
during deformation of a system and in which energy form and the Maxwell-Betti theorem, or Castigliano’s theorem.
Basic terms of materials strength
where this work is stored.
The starting point of all energy methods is the principle of vir
Types of stress In studying the strength of materials, the energy methods are tual work. It expresses an equilibrium condition and states: If a
based on the law of conservation of energy and on the principle mechanical system is in equilibrium under the effect of external
Components can be subjected to stress in different ways: tension, pressure, shear stress, bending, torsion, buckling and com-
that all energy transferred to a body or a system from outside and internal forces, then the sum of the total virtual work, pro-
posite stresses.
is converted to internal energy, e.g. into deformation, change in duced by internal and external forces and any virtual displace-
velocity, or heat. ment are equal to zero.
F
Tension Pressure
Principle of virtual work δW = F · δ x = 0; δW = M · δφ = 0
σ σ σ σ
F F F F δW = ∑ δW = ∑ F · δ x = 0 δW virtual work,
δx virtual displacement,
δW = ∑ δW = ∑ M · δφ = 0 δφ virtual twisting angle,
M moment, F force
F
F
F F
Strain gauge
M σ M τ
F F !(¡{
1
Experimental stress and strain analysis uses the mechanical stress
σ τ that occurs in components under load to determine the material
F stress. An experimental method for determining mechanical stress
is based on the relation between stress and the deformation it
causes. This deformation is known as strain and occurs on the sur-
!(¡{
2
Torsion face of the components, which means that it can be measured. The
τ principle of strain measurement is an important branch of experi-
Mt mental stress and strain analysis.
F
078 079
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
Elastic deformations
Basic knowledge
Elastic deformations
Components are differently stressed when subjected to load means that all atoms return to their original position once the
from external forces. Load causes stresses in the components. force action ends. Different loads lead to typical component
Determination elastic behaviour
The mesh of the material is deformed under force action, e.g. deformations.
There is direct proportionality between deformation and from the stress-strain diagram (also see chapter 6 Materials
compressed and stretched. This load leads to volume or shape
applied force. Therefore, it is necessary to know the material testing).
deformation. Unlike plastic deformation, elastic deformation
properties as well as the stress to determine the strain or
In strength of materials, we consider the linear-elastic region,
elastic deformation. These material properties, known as the
since the deformation of the material is reversible in this
Deformation of beams modulus of elasticity, describe the relation between stress
region. When designing beams or supporting structures, the
and strain in the deformation of a solid body with linear elas-
Deflection and load-bearing capacity of beams are extremely Deflection depends on the dimensions, material properties and linear-elastic region should not be exceeded.
tic behaviour. The elastic modulus can be calculated from the
important in practice, in structural engineering and bridge especially on how the beams are mounted at the ends. measured values of the tensile test or determined graphically
building as well as in mechanical and automotive engineering.
σ σ
c
Re
b Rm 1 2 3
Rp
Compression
Extension F
F M
Re
M M Rp
Compression a
Δσ
Extension
Δσ
E = Δε
Δε
Tensile stress results in the extension of the outer strands, whereas compressive stress results in compression of the outer strands. ε ε
The neutral strand (green) passes through the centroid and is neither compressed nor extended.
M moment, F force
The elastic region is divided into a linear-elastic component a, where the strain is proportional to the stress and is reversible
and a nonlinear-elastic component b, where the strain is not proportional to the stress but is still reversible. In the plastic
Deformation of bars due region, the strain is not reversible and the deformation remains even after the force has been removed.
to a twisting moment
When subject to a load due σ stress, ε strain, E elastic modulus, Rp proportional limit, Re yield strength, Rm tensile strength, 1 elastic region, 2 plastic region,
to a twisting moment, bars 3 constriction to fracture, a linear-elastic component, b nonlinear-elastic component, c Hooke’s straight line
are twisted about their bar F
τ
axis. The torsional defor-
mation is described by the The calculation of deformations under load
is described by Hooke’s law of elasticity Elastic modulus for various materials
twisting angle φ. Hooke’s law
states that the twisting Material E in N/mm²
angle φ is proportional to
the externally acting twist- F steel 2,1 · 105
σ=E·ε =
ing moment. Mt φ A
F aluminium 0,7 · 105
Mt
σ stress, E elastic modulus, ε strain, F force, A area
Mt concrete 0,3 · 105
080 081
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
SE 110.14 SE 110.14
Elastic line of a beam Elastic line of a beam
Specification
Technical data
Beams
• steel, LxWxH: 1000x20x3mm
1 pinned support, 2 weight, 3 fixed support with clamp, 4 beam, 5 SE 112 frame, 6 dial • brass, LxWxH: 1000x20x6mm
gauge
• aluminium, LxWxH: 1000x20x6mm
Weights
• 2x 1N (hanger)
• 10x 1N
• 6x 5N
The illustration shows SE 110.14 in the SE 112 mounting frame. Measuring ranges
• travel: 0…20mm
• graduation: 0,01mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments
LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
• beams of different materials: The experimental setup includes three • elastic line under varying load Weight: approx. 42kg (total)
steel, brass and aluminium beams made of different materials. Two • elastic line under various support con-
pinned supports and one fixed support ditions
Scope of delivery
Beams are important design elements with clamp are available. The dial gauges • demonstration of Maxwell–Betti’s the-
in mechanical engineering and building record the resulting deformation of the orem
3 beams
construction that can deform under beam. The parts of the experiment are • elastic line and support forces in static- Bending on a cantilever beam: f draw down of the beam’s end, x distance, a unloaded region
clearly laid out and securely housed in a ally indeterminate systems with linear elastic line, b loaded region
2 pinned supports
load. Beams are subjected to load trans- 1 fixed support with clamp
versely in the axial direction, which leads storage system.
2 dial gauges with bracket
to deflection. In linear–elastic material
behaviour, the bending line, also known The entire experimental setup is con- 1 set of weights
as elastic line, is used to determine the structed in the SE 112 mounting frame. 1 storage system with foam inlay
deflection of beams. Deflection can be 1 set of instructional material
determined at any point on the beam us- Order number 022.11014
ing the influence coefficients and Max-
well–Betti’s commutative theory.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
082 083
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
WP 950 WP 950
Deformation of straight beams Deformation of straight beams
Specification
1 beam, 2 weight, 3 support with clamp fixing, 4 support with force gauge, 5 dial gauge, Technical data
6 adjustable hook
Beam
• length: 1000mm
• cross-sections: 3x20mm (steel), 4x20mm (steel),
6x20mm (steel, brass, aluminium)
Measuring ranges
• force: ±50N, graduation: 1N
Description Learning objectives/experiments • travel: 0…20mm, graduation: 0,01mm
• deformation of a beam on two or The beam under investigation in • investigation of the deflection for stat- Weights
more supports under point loads WP 950 can be supported in different ically determinate and statically inde- • 4x 2,5N (hanger)
(e.g. single-span beam) ways. This produces statically determin- terminate straight beams • 4x 2,5N
• deformation of a cantilever beam ate and indeterminate systems which · cantilever beam • 16x 5N
under point loads are placed under load by different · single-span beam, dual- or triple-span
• statically determinate or inde- weights. The load application points are beam Elastic lines for statically determinate (left) and indeterminate (right) cases: 1 single-span
LxWxH: 1400x400x630mm (frame)
movable. Three dial gauges record the · formulation of the differential equa- beam with fixed and movable support, 2 cantilever, 3 beam with 2 fixed supports,
terminate systems resulting deformation. Three articulated tion for the elastic line 4 propped cantilever Weight: approx. 37kg
LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
supports with integral force gauges in- • deflection on a cantilever beam
Beams are key structural elements in Weight: approx. 12kg (storage system)
dicate the support reactions directly. · measurement of deflection at the
mechanical engineering and in construc- The articulated supports are height-ad- force application point
tion. A beam is a bar-shaped component justable, so as to compensate for the in- • deflection of a dual-span beam on Scope of delivery
in which the dimensions of the cross- fluence of the dead- weight of the beam three supports
section are much smaller than the under investigation. A fourth support · measurement of the support reac- 1 frame
length and which is subjected to load clamps the beam in place. tions 5 beams
along and perpendicular to its longitudin- · measurement of the deformations 4 supports
al axis. The load perpendicular to the lon- Five beams of different thicknesses and • influence of the material (modulus of 1 set of weights
gitudinal axis causes a deformation of made of different materials demon- elasticity) and the beam cross-section 3 dial gauges
the beam – that is, bending. Based on strate the influence of the geometry and (geometry) on the elastic line 1 storage system with foam inlay
its size, the beam is viewed as a one-di- of the modulus of elasticity on the de- • Maxwell-Betti coefficients and law 1 set of instructional material
mensional model. formation of the beam under load. • application of the principle of virtual
work on statically determinate and in- Order number 020.95000
The science of the strength of materials The various elements of the experiment determinate beams
deals with stress and strain resulting are clearly laid-out and housed securely • determination of lines of influence
from the application of load to a com- in a storage system. The complete ex- · arithmetically
ponent. Many fundamental principles of Superposition principle: the total elastic line of the statically indeterminate beam (left) is the
perimental setup is arranged in the · qualitatively by way of force method sum of the deformations of the external force at the support (right)
the strength of materials can be illus- frame. (Müller-Breslau)
trated well by a straight beam.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
084 085
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
SE 110.47 SE 110.47
Methods to determine the elastic line Methods to determine the elastic line
Specification
Technical data
Beam
• length: 1000mm
• cross-section: 20x4mm
The picture shows SE 110.47 in a frame similar to SE 112.
• material: steel
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
086 087
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
SE 110.29 SE 110.29
Torsion of bars Torsion of bars
Specification
Technical data
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
088 089
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
WP 100 WP 100
Deformation of bars under bending or torsion Deformation of bars under bending or torsion
Specification
1 beam, 2 clamp fixing for bending test, 3 support block, 4 weight, 5 device to generate the Technical data
twisting moment in the torsion test, 6 support for bending test, 7 clamping chuck for tor-
sion test, 8 dial gauge
17 bars for bending tests
• material: aluminium, steel, brass, copper
• height with LxW 510x20mm: h=3…10mm
• width with LxH 510x5mm: w=10…30mm
• length with WxH 20x4mm: l=210…510mm
• LxWxH: 20x4x510mm (Al, St, brass, Cu)
• LxWxH: 10x10x510mm (aluminium)
22 torsion bars
Description Learning objectives/experiments • material: aluminium, steel, brass, copper
• length with d=10mm: 50…640mm (aluminium)
• elastic deformation of statically A dial gauge records the resulting de- • bending tests • dxL: 10x50mm/10x340mm (aluminium, steel, cop-
determinate or indeterminate formation. The support blocks include · determination of the modulus of per, brass)
beams under bending load clamping chucks to hold the torsion bars elasticity • diameter with L=50/340mm: d=5…12mm (steel)
• elastic torsion of round bars un- and supports for the bars in the bend · statically determinate systems
der twisting moment test. The supports offer a range of (beam mounted on two supports; Dial gauge
• influence of material, cross-sec- clamping options, enabling statically de- cantilever beam) • 0…10mm, graduation: 0,01mm
terminate or indeterminate bearing sup- · statically indeterminate systems Beam deflection of a statically determinate (left) and indeterminate (right) system:
tion and clamping length on de- ports to be investigated. (dual-span beam) 1 cantilever beam, 2 simply supported beam, 3 propped cantilever, 4 built in beam
Tape measure
formation · deformation of a beam dependent • graduation: 0,01m
The twisting moment is applied by a on material, geometry (section
Bending and torsion are typical loads to device mounted on a support block. The width, height and length), type of sup-
which components are subjected. The Weights
point of load application to generate the port and length of span • 1x 1N (hanger)
resultant stresses and deformations bending moment is adjustable. · formulation of proportional relation-
can lead to failure of the component. A • 1x 1N, 1x 4N, 1x 5N, 1x 9N
ships for the deformation
number of different factors play a role in The various elements of the experiment • torsion tests
this, including the material, the cross- are clearly laid-out and housed securely · determination of the shear modulus LxWxH: 1000x250x200mm
section of the bar, the clamping length in a storage system. The complete ex- of various materials Weight: approx. 18kg
and the method of bearing support. perimental setup is arranged on the · angle of twist dependent on clamp- LxWxH: 1170x480x207mm (storage system)
frame. ing length, bar diameter Weight: approx. 12kg (storage system)
WP 100 investigates the influence of · formulation of proportional relation-
these factors on the deformation of a ships for the angle of twist Scope of delivery
bar under bending load or twisting mo-
ment. A set of test bars has been as- 1 frame
sembled so as to permit direct compar- 2 support blocks
ison of measuring results. The bar under 1 device to generate the twisting moment
investigation is fixed to two movable sup- Torsion on round bar: F applied force, a lever arm, r radius, γ shear angle, φ angle of twist
17 bars for bending test
port blocks and loaded down by a 22 torsion bars
weight. 1 dial gauge with bracket, 1 tape measure
1 set of weights including hanger
2 hexagon socket wrenches
1 storage system with foam inlay
1 set of instructional material
Order number 020.10000
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
090 091
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
SE 110.20 SE 110.20
Deformation of frames Deformation of frames
Specification
1 U-shaped frame, 2 weight, 3 short clamping pillar, 4 roller bearing, 5 deflection roller with Technical data
fixture, 6 movable hook, 7 dial gauge, 8 frame SE 112
Dial gauges
The picture shows SE 110.20 in a frame similar to SE 112.
• measuring range: 0…20mm
• graduation: 0,01mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Weights
• elastic deformation of a statically By applying various methods (first-order • relationship between load application • 2x 1N (hanger)
determinate or indeterminate elasticity theory; the principle of super- and deformation on the frame • 8x 1N
frame under point load position; and the principle of virtual • differences between statically determ- • 6x 5N
• U-shaped and S-shaped frame work), the bending moment character- inate and statically indeterminate
• principle of virtual work to calcu- istics are ascertained for a statically de- frames LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
terminate and indeterminate frame. • familiarisation with the first-order 1 S-shaped frame, 2 long clamping pillar Weight: approx. 34kg (total)
late the deformation and support
From these characteristic curves and a elasticity theory for statically determin-
reaction in a statically indeterm- chart for integrals (coupling table) the ate and indeterminate systems
inate system Scope of delivery
differential equation of the bend line is • application of the principle of superpos-
formulated. From the bend line and its ition
A frame is a bent beam with rigid 2 frames (1x U-shaped, 1x S-shaped)
derivations, displacements and the sup- • application of the principle of virtual
corners which creates a so-called struc- port force on the movable support can work on statically determinate and
2 clamping pillars (1x long, 1x short)
ture gauge. This means that it spans a be calculated. statically indeterminate frames 1 support
gap while at the same time creating · determination of a deformation by 1 set of weights with movable hooks
height. A second, S-shaped frame can be used the principle of virtual forces 1 deflection roller with fixture
to show that the various methods are · determination of a load by the prin- 1 cable
SE 110.20 includes a typical U-shaped applicable to any kind of frame. All the ciple of virtual displacement 2 dial gauges with bracket
frame, such as is used in the construc- component elements of the experiment • comparison of calculated and meas- 1 storage system with foam inlay
tion of halls for example. One end is are clearly laid-out and housed securely ured deformations 1 set of instructional material
clamped into place, while the other can in a storage system.
be loosely mounted. When the non- Order number 022.11020
clamped end remains free, the statically The complete experimental setup is ar-
determinate frame is investigated. A ranged in the frame SE 112.
roller bearing on the non-clamped end Example deformations of the statically indeterminate frame under load:
creates a statically indeterminate frame. red: deformed frame; black: frame under no load
The frame is placed under load by
weights. The load application points are
movable. Two dial gauges record the de-
formations of the frame under load.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
092 093
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
FL 170 FL 170
Deformation of curved-axis beams Deformation of curved-axis beams
Curved-axis beam
1 circular beam, 2 weight, 3 semi-circular beam, 4 quadrant beam, 5 support block, 6 dial • radius: approx. 150mm
gauge, 7 support, 8 pillar
• cross-section WxH: 20x5mm
• material: steel, galvanised
Dial gauges
• measuring range: 0…20mm
• graduation: 0,01mm
Weights
• 1x 1N (hanger)
• 2x 2N
• 1x 5N
• 1x 10N
• 4x 20N
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
094 095
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
SE 110.44 SE 110.44
Deformation of trusses Deformation of trusses
Specification
Technical data
1 support with node disk, 2 cross arm for lateral stability of truss, 3 load application device Truss with 19 PVC bars
with force gauge, 4 node disk, 5 dial gauge, 6 frame SE 112
• height of truss: max. 450mm
• length of truss: max. 900mm
• bar lengths: 2x 150mm, 5x 259mm, 7x 300mm,
1x 397mm, 3x 424mm, 1x 520mm
• angle between bars: 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
• maximum bar force: 200N
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
096 097
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations
TM 262 TM 262
Hertzian pressure Hertzian pressure
• resulting shape of the contact area un- [1] demonstration of Hertzian pressure
der point contact with different radii of [2] silicone rubber pressure pad
curvature [3] transparent plastic plate with grid lines makes it
• shape of the contact area as a func- easier to measure the contact area
tion of the contact force [4] spring scale to measure force
• influence of an additional transverse [5] movable device for the spring balance to generate
component of the contact force a continuously adjustable contact force
[6] optimum illumination of the contact area by side-
mounted halogen lamp
Technical data
Spring balance
• 0…25N
1 double convex plexiglas disk, 2 halogen lamp, 3 sliding weight to compensate the mass of • graduation: 0,5N
the load mechanism, 4 load mechanism, 5 rubber pressure pad with convex surface,
6 spring balance, 7 movable device for the spring balance
Pressure pad
• 60 Shore
Halogen lamp
• voltage: 12V
• power: 20W
LxWxH: 400x400x530mm
Weight: approx. 16kg
Scope of delivery
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
098 099
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Elastic deformations Accessories
TM 400 SE 112
Hooke’s law Mounting frame
1 stand
2 helical springs
1 set of weights
1 storage system with foam inlay
1 set of instructional material
Order number 040.40000
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
100 101
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
Buckling and stability
Basic knowledge
Stability problem: buckling
If slim and long components such as bars, beams and columns reaches the buckling force FK of the bar, the bar suddenly starts
are subject to compressive stress owing to a force along the to buckle. The components, thus, lose their ability to function.
Euler’s buckling cases
bar axis, these can end up in indifferent or unstable equilibrium Buckling is usually a very sudden and abrupt process which
The mathematician and physicist Leonhard Euler defined four typical buckling cases to calculate the buckling force. For each of these
positions. If the force F is less than the critical force FK, also causes large deformations.
cases, there is a buckling length coefficient β that is used to determine the buckling length LK.
known as buckling force, the component is in a stable equilib-
rium position and there is a strength problem. If the force F
LK = 0,5L
LK = 0,7L
LK = 2L
LK = L
F F
Bars under pressure are a typical stability problem. Here, we conditions, bending stiffness and geometry of the shape of the
investigate when a straight bar collapses. The critical buckling bar cross-section. Euler’s four buckling cases are taken as the Determining the buckling force FK Determining the buckling stress σK
force FK describes the smallest possible compressive force basis for the study of the bending stability of bars with constant
under which the bar buckles. The critical buckling stress σK To determine the buckling stress we use the degree of slenderness λ as
bending stiffness.
is the stress that occurs at the critical buckling force FK. The a material parameter and the moment of area radius i.
π2 · E · I
buckling force for pressure-loaded bars depends on the support FK =
LK2 β·L
λ=
i π2 · E
σK =
FK critical buckling force, LK bar length, E elastic modulus, λ2
I axial second moment of the cross-section area I
i=
A
102 103
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Buckling and stability
SE 110.19 SE 110.19
Investigation of simple stability problems Investigation of simple stability problems
Specification
1 articulated support, 2 support with pressure pad and stop screw, 3 buckling bar, 4 artic- Technical data
ulated spring, 5 deflection roller, 6 weight, 7 articulated support, 8 leaf spring,
9 weight, 10 load application lever with scale, 11 frame SE 112
Two-part buckling bar with central joint
• WxH: 20x20mm
• length: 2x250mm
• support: pinned-pinned (articulated-articulated)
Elastic joint
The illustration shows SE 110.19 in a frame similar to SE 112.
• 2 tension springs, rigidity: 2N/mm
• lever arm: 50mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments Elastic clamp fixing with steel leaf spring
• length: 500mm
• representation of simple stability The continuously variable loading is de- • determination of the buckling force for • cross-section: 10x2mm
problems on a buckling bar termined precisely with the aid of a the case of an: • second moment of area: 6,66mm4
• determination of the buckling scale on the load application lever. · elastic joint • modulus of elasticity: 205000N/mm2
load under different conditions · elastic fixed end support
• continuously variable load applica- Experiments can depict a variety of con- • investigation of the buckling behaviour Compressive force range: 25…120N
ditions, such as an elastic joint or an under the influence of: Shear force: 0…20N
tion on the buckling bar
elastic clamp fixing. Two tension springs · of additional shear forces 1) experimental setup for elastic support
2) experimental setup for elastic joint; Load application lever, lever ratio: 1:2…1:5
serve as the elastic joint. For the elastic · of pre-deformation
Buckling is a stability problem which oc- clamp fixing option, a steel leaf spring is
Fk buckling force, F1 articulation force, FAy support reaction,
curs in practice when slim components Mφ internal bending moment, Lφ deflection, cφ torsional rigidity,
mounted in the bottom joint. The vari- φ deflection angle
Weights
are subjected to compressive loading. able length of the leaf spring means vari- • 2x 1N (hanger)
Following a “disturbance” to its equilibri- ous degrees of clamping are possible. • 8x 1N
um, such as caused by compressive The two cases can be combined. • 6x 5N
loading, a stable system returns to equi-
librium when the loading is removed. If Another experiment demonstrates the LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
the compressive load increases excess- influence of additional shear forces. It in- Weight: approx. 28kg (total)
ively, instability of the system results. volves applying a shear force to the joint
The component buckles and fails. The in the buckling bar with a cable and a Scope of delivery
critical compressive load at which the weight.
system becomes unstable is termed the
1 buckling bar, two-part
buckling force. In all experiments the buckling bar is 1 set of weights
placed under load until it reaches an un- 4 supports
A simple model for representing stability stable situation. The length of the lever
problems is a two-part bar with an elast- 1 deflection roller
arm at which the buckling bar buckles is 1 load application lever
ic joint which remains stable up to a cer- read from the scale and the buckling
tain load level. If the buckling force is ex- 1 leaf spring
force is then determined.
ceeded, the bar suddenly buckles and so 2 tension springs
becomes unstable. All the component elements of the ex- 1) experimental setup for elastic joint with transverse loading 1 cord
periment are clearly laid-out and housed 2) free-body diagram; FQ shear force, FB and FA support reactions, Mφ internal bending mo- 1 hexagon socket wrench
SE 110.19 is used to investigate simple ment, Lφ deflection, φ deflection angle, Fk buckling force, F1 articulation force, F2 cable force
securely in a storage system. The com- 1 storage system with foam inlay
stability problems on a buckling bar un- plete experimental setup is arranged in 1 set of instructional material
der different conditions. The buckling the frame SE 112.
bar is in two parts, with a central articu- Order number 022.11019
lated joint. A compressive load is applied
to the bar by a lever and weights.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
104 105
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Buckling and stability
SE 110.57 SE 110.57
Buckling of bars Buckling of bars
Specification
Technical data
Test bars
• 3x steel, LxWxH: 600x20x4mm
1 load mechanism, 2 dial gauges for lateral deflection of the sample bar, 3 test bar, • 2x aluminium, LxWxH: 600x25x6mm
4 weight, 5 cable, 6 SE 112 mounting frame
• 1x aluminium, LxD: 600x10mm
• 1x aluminium, LxWxH: 600x15x2mm
Weights
• 1x 2,5N (hanger)
• 3x 5N
The illustration shows SE 110.57 in the SE 112 mounting frame. Measuring ranges
• force: ±5kN
• travel: 0…10mm, graduation: 0,01mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments
LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
• demonstration of buckling in bars This experiment also demonstrates that • investigation of buckling behaviour un- Weight: approx. 30kg (total)
• test bars made of different ma- other factors affect the buckling beha- der the influence of
terials and for different support viour, such as the material and the · different supports, clamps
Scope of delivery
types cross-sections. Another experiment · different cross-sections
• experiments with eccentric ap- shows the influence of additional shear · different materials
1 load mechanism
forces. In this experiment, a shear force · additional shear forces Various equilibrium positions: a stable, b indifferent, c unstable;
plication of force and shear 1 set of test bars
is applied to the joint in the buckling bar • testing Euler’s theory: buckling on position 1 deflection of the bar due to load, position 2 bar after load is removed
forces through a cable and a weight. elastic bars 1 support
• measure force and displacement 2 dial gauges
Long and slim components such as The parts of the experiment are clearly • calculate the expected buckling force 1 cable
bars, beams and columns are often sub- laid out and securely housed in a stor- with Euler’s buckling formula 1 pulley
jected to compressive forces along their age system. The entire experimental • graphical analysis of the deflection and 1 set of weights
long axis owing to their function. Under setup is constructed in the SE 112 the force 1 storage system with foam inlay
the influence of critical compressive mounting frame. 1 set of instructional material
forces, such components can lose stabil-
ity and deform laterally. The technical Order number 022.11057
term for this loss of stability, which oc-
curs suddenly or continuously, is buck-
ling. In this case, it is not the material
that fails but the component shape. The
stresses in the bar are often still in the
elastic region.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
106 107
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Buckling and stability
WP 121 WP 121
Demonstration of Euler buckling Demonstration of Euler buckling
Specification
Technical data
Test bars
• quantity: 4
• bar length: 180mm
• bar cross-section: 0,5x12mm
1 weight, 2 pinned support, 3 bar, 4 backing wall with grid pattern, 5 fixed support, 6 mount • material: steel 1.4310 cold-worked
for weight
• buckling loads: approx. 2…32N
Weights
• 10x 5N
• 5x 1N
LxWxH: 380x110x270mm
Weight: approx. 10kg
LxWxH: 720x480x178mm (storage system)
Weight: approx. 10kg (storage system)
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Scope of delivery
• demonstration of all buckling The test bars are made of stainless • demonstration of various buckling
cases of Euler buckling spring steel, and remain within the problems 1 experimental unit
• buckling length clearly visible with elastic range during the experiment. · Euler case 1 – fixed-free bar 4 test bars
various methods of support · Euler case 2 – pinned-pinned bar
1 set of weights
• test bars made of spring steel The test bars are either fixed or pinned · Euler case 3 – fixed-pinned bar
(free to rotate), depending on the · Euler case 4 – fixed-fixed bar 1 storage system with foam inlay
• set of finely graduated weights Buckling length dependent on end conditions of bars:
chosen support method. This enables all • familiarisation with the correlation 1) Euler case 1: fixed-free bar 1 set of instructional material
buckling cases according to Euler to be between buckling length, buckling load 2) Euler case 2: pinned-pinned bar
In stability theory, the four cases of Euler 3) Euler case 3: fixed-pinned bar (pinned at the top) Order number 020.12100
set up with the various support condi- and various methods of support 4) Euler case 4: fixed-fixed bar;
buckling represent the elastic flexural tions. Mounts are provided in the top F applied buckling load, s buckling length
buckling of straight bars. Above a spe- supports to hold the weights.
cific load – the buckling load – a loss of Load is gradually applied to the test bars
stability occurs and the bar increasingly in small increments. This enables the
changes shape. The axis of the bar is de- sudden loss of stability – the buckling –
flected laterally. Euler describes four to be clearly shown.
cases for the buckling of an elastic bar
with central application of compressive The various elements of the experiment
force and various methods of support. are clearly laid-out and housed securely
in a storage system.
WP 121 demonstrates the four cases
of Euler buckling. Depending on the end
conditions, different weights are re-
quired until the buckling load is reached
and the axes of the bars are laterally de-
flected. The buckling length is clearly vis-
ible against the white backing wall with
the grid patterning.
Storage system
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
108 109
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Buckling and stability
WP 120 WP 120
Buckling behaviour of bars Buckling behaviour of bars
• investigation of buckling behaviour un- [1] investigation of all relevant buckling cases
der the influence of [2] verification of Euler’s theory of buckling
· different supports and clamps [3] experiments in the horizontal or vertical position
· different bar lengths and cross-sec- [4] test bars with different lengths made of different
tions materials
· different materials [5] test bars pinned or fixed
· additional lateral load [6] spindle for applying forces
• testing Euler’s theory: buckling on [7] lateral load mechanism generates shear forces
elastic bars [8] force measurement using a hydraulic dynamomet-
• calculating the expected buckling force er
with Euler’s formula [9] measurement of lateral deflection with a dial gauge
• graphical analysis of the deflection and [10] further experiments with WP 120.01 expansion
the force set
• determine elastic modulus for an un- [11] storage system for parts
known material (GFRP) 1 spindle, 2 height-adjustable load member, 3 dial gauge for lateral deflection of the test
• measure force and deflection with the bar, 4 dynamometer, 5 mechanism for generating a lateral load, 6 test bar
Technical data
WP 120.01 expansion set
• investigation of buckling behaviour un- Test bars
der the influence of • quantity: 11
· different cross-section shapes • bar lengths: 350…700mm (max.)
· eccentric application of force • materials: aluminium, copper, brass, steel, GFRP
• cross-sections: 10x4mm, 25x6mm, 25x10mm
Load spindle
• force: max. 2000N
• stroke: max. 10mm
Measuring ranges
• force: 0…2500N, graduation: 50N
a) experiment on how bar length affects the buckling behaviour: • deflection: 0…20mm, graduation: 0,01mm
F applied force, L bar length; 1 top movable support, 2 top clamp, 3 bottom movable sup-
port, 4 bottom clamp
Weight for lateral load: max. 20N
Description • 1x 5N (hanger), 3x 5N
• investigation of all relevant buck- In this experiment, a bar is clamped or The experiments can be conducted in a LxWxH: 620x450x1150mm
ling problems supported at both ends in the experi- vertical or horizontal position; the force Weight: approx. 63kg
• verification of Euler’s theory of mental unit, depending on the buckling gauge can be rotated by 90°. LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
buckling case. A height-adjustable loading mem-
Weight: approx. 12kg (storage system)
• experiments with eccentric ap- ber and a hand-operated spindle are An expansion set with sample bars ex-
used to apply a compressive force to the pands the scope of experiments that
plication of force and lateral load Scope of delivery
bar. An axial support between the can be conducted with WP 120. The
• extensive instructional material
spindle and bar support prevents tor- parts of the experiment are clearly laid
1 experimental unit
sional stress on the test bar. The ap- out and securely housed in a storage
In engineering mechanics, loss of stabil- plied force is hydraulically measured and system. 1 set of test bars
ity is known as buckling. The bar axis lat- displayed on a force gauge. A dial gauge 1 dial gauge with bracket
erally deflects under the effect of com- indicates the lateral deflection of the 1 storage system with foam inlay
pressive forces and with increasing load bar. 1 set of instructional material
until it suddenly and violently fails, just
before the fracture strength is reached. Order number 020.12000
Experiments demonstrate how various Experiment with eccentric application of force (WP 120.01):
The stresses in the bar are often still in factors such as bar length, material and F applied force, e eccentricity, w deflection, My bending moment,
the elastic region. support type affect the buckling beha- F/Fk compressive force based on critical compressive force;
diagram: deflection of the test bar for varying eccentricity
viour. Additional shear forces can be
WP 120 investigates the buckling beha- generated on the test bar by means of a
viour of bars under different influences. lateral load mechanism.
All relevant buckling problems are
demonstrated in experiments.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
110 111
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
Buckling and stability
Accessories for WP 120 GUNT storage systems keep your lab tidy!
112 113
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Compound stress
FL 160 FL 160
Unsymmetrical bending Unsymmetrical bending
Specification
Technical data
1 dial gauge, 2 device to adjust the eccentricity of the load application point and flange to Aluminium beam
mount the load, 3 weight, 4 clamping pillar, 5 clamping flange of beam with angle scale,
6 beam
• deformed length: 500mm
Dial gauges
• 0…10mm, graduation: 0,01mm
Angle scale
• 0…360°, graduation: 1°
Description Learning objectives/experiments Weights
• 1x 2,5N (hanger)
• symmetrical and unsymmetrical FL 160 is used to perform experiments • product moment of inertia (I yz) and axi- • 1x 2,5N
bending on a beam relating to symmetrical and unsymmet- al second moment of area (I y, I z) • 3x 5N
• symmetrical and unsymmetrical rical bending and to combined bending • Bernoulli hypothesis
cross-sectional profiles: I, L and U and torsion loading. The beam under in- • symmetrical bending on a beam (uni-
vestigation is clamped into place on one axial) LxWxH: 700x350x400mm
• combined bending and torsion Weight: approx. 25kg
end and loaded down at the free end. · with I-profile
loading by way of eccentric force LxWxH: 720x480x178mm (storage system)
Two dial gauges record the horizontal · with L-profile Beam: 1 I-profile, 2 L-profile, 3 U-profile
application and vertical deformation of the beam. · with U-profile
• unsymmetrical bending (complex) on a Scope of delivery
Symmetrical bending of a beam – also The unit includes three beams with dif- beam with an L-profile
known as uniaxial bending – occurs ferent cross-sectional profiles: I, L and U. · calculation of the neutral fibres 1 experimental unit
when the load plane coincides with one The beam can be clamped with freedom • combined bending and torsion loading 3 beams
of the main axes of the beam cross-sec- to rotate in any direction. This enables by way of eccentric force application 2 dial gauges with bracket
tion. The beam then deflects in the dir- investigation of loading along the main • determination of the shear centre on a 1 set of weights
ection of the load and can be described axis or of the general load case. An beam with a U-profile 1 spirit level
by elastic lines. angle scale at the clamping point indic- · familiarisation with shear flow (shear 1 hexagon socket wrench
ates the angular position of the beam. It forces in a cross-section) 1 storage system with foam inlay
In unsymmetrical bending of a beam – is possible to adjust the load application • comparison of calculated and meas-
also known as complex or biaxial bend- 1 set of instructional material
point eccentrically, so that purely unsym- ured values
ing – the main axes of the cross-section metrical bending or combined bending Order number 021.16000
do not coincide with the direction of and torsion loading is investigated.
loading. To prevent torsion, the line of
application of the load must pass The various elements of the experiment
through the shear centre. If it does not, are clearly laid-out and housed securely
the beam undergoes combined bending in a storage system. 1 on application of the force at the centre of gravity the beam twists, 2 on application of the
and torsion loading. force at the shear centre no torsion occurs;
M shear centre, S centre of gravity, F force, t shear flow
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
114 115
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Compound stress
WP 130 WP 130
Verification of stress hypotheses Verification of stress hypotheses
• generation of multi-axial loads on test [1] experiments verifying comparative stress hypo-
samples made of ductile metals: theses from the science of the strength of materi-
· steel, copper, brass, aluminium als
• generation of various load moments [2] 7 different load combinations of bending and tor-
· pure bending moment sion
· pure twisting moment [3] loading of the test specimen without shear force by
· combined bending moment and compensation for the influence of dead-load
twisting moment [4] test specimens made of steel, copper, brass, alu-
• determination of the yield point minium
• verification of the Rankine yield cri- [5] generation of load moments by means of weight
terion and lever arm
• verification of the Tresca yield criterion [6] measurement of the deformation at the point of
• representation in Mohr’s circle of maximum deflection
stresses and strains [7] storage system to house the components
1 dial gauge, 2 balance weight, 3 weight, 4 loading plate, 5 test specimen in clamps, 6 de-
flection roller and cable to compensate for the dead-load of the plate
Technical data
Specimens
• length: 49mm
• clamping length: 11,5mm
• specimen diameter in measuring cross-section:
d=4mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
116 117
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
Experimental stress and strain analysis
When dimensioning components are subject to mechanical load Two methods of non-destructive experimental stress and strain
Representation of the stress distribution using photoelasticity
so that they can properly perform their function, it is necessary analysis are presented here:
to know the nature of the loads. In particular, it is important to
• the electrical method of strain measurement using strain Photoelasticity is a method with great illustrative qualities and ically or numerically performed stress considerations can be
determine the maximum occurring stresses, which ultimately
gauges to indirectly determine the actual stresses a simple experimental setup, in which two-dimensional stresses visually verified.
define the dimensions. These stresses should be determined in
in the model of a component are made visible. Polarised light
advance and then tested by experiment. Experimental stress • the photoelastic method for a direct representation of the The relevant effect is attributed to the birefringence of trans-
shines through the model – which is made of a special trans-
and strain analysis can therefore be regarded as a link between stress distribution parent materials under mechanical load and light exposure. In
parent plastic – and it is subjected to mechanical load. The load
theoretical calculation and experimental evidence. plastics, birefringence occurs in the direction of the principal
causes stresses in the model. This causes birefringence in the
stresses. These physical properties are used in photoelasticity
plastic in the direction of the principal stresses. Stresses can
to make visible stresses or the resulting strains. This is why
be made visible in the model using a polarisation filter (analyser).
plastic models are used in these experiments instead of the
Photoelasticity, therefore, provides a complete picture of the
original materials.
stress field and offers a good overview of areas of high stress
Strain measurement using strain gauges concentration and areas of low stress. Consequently, analyt-
Stresses in components can be determined via the circuitous Strain gauges comprise resistance wires that are adhered to the
route of strain measurement, as the strain of the material is surface of the workpiece. If the surface is extended, the wire is
directly related to the material stress. An important branch of lengthened and its cross-section decreases. This increases the Principle of photoelasticity
experimental stress and strain analysis is based on the principle electrical resistance. In the case of compression, the resistance
of strain measurement. The advantage of this method is that decreases. In a Wheatstone bridge, the resistors are connected
strain gauges can be used on real components in operation. as a voltage divider. The measuring circuit is particularly suited !(¡{
1 !(¡{
2 !(¡{
3 !(¡{
4 !(¡{
5 !(¡{
6 !(¡{
7
for measuring small changes in resistance and, therefore, for
determining the resistance change of a strain gauge.
F F
F F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
Dark field of an Dark field
arch in mono of an arch in
chromatic light, white light,
F F F F force F force
Uniaxial stress state Biaxial stress state Unknown direction Torsional strain Shear stress in the A polariscope can be used to study transparent models of com- The arch shown here is loaded by the force F like a vault. The high
such as tension or of principal stress neutral strand ponents, whose optical properties change under the influence density of isochromats in the inner circle of the arch – where
pressure
of internal stresses. If the model is stress-free, there is no the highest stresses occur – can be clearly seen. The individ-
birefringence and the model appears black. If a load is applied ual lines are better resolved in monochromatic light, and in the
Different structural shapes for different applications
and increased, this creates a path difference that increases in above illustration, we can clearly recognise the onion-like linear
F force proportion to the magnitude of the difference in the principal paths under the application of force.
stresses.
118 119
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 101 FL 101
Strain gauge application set Strain gauge application set
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
120 121
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 100 FL 100
Strain gauge training system Strain gauge training system
Specification
1 fixture, 2 strain gauge measuring point, 3 measuring amplifier, 4 weight, 5 bending Technical data
bar, 6 adjustable rider
Tension bar
• measuring length: 50mm
• cross-section: 2x10mm
Bending bar
• length: 385mm
• cross-section: 5x20mm
Torsion bar
• length: 500mm
• d=10mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Weights
• basic introduction to measure- The specimens can be inserted quickly • fundamentals of measuring with strain • small: 10x 0,5N, 1x 1N (hanger)
ment with strain gauges and precisely into the frame. The strain gauges • large: 1x 5N, 2x 10N, 1x 20N, 1x 5N (hanger)
• test bars for tension, bending gauge measuring range is protected by • strain gauge types and application
and torsion with strain gauge a Plexiglas cover, which also makes it techniques Strain gauge measuring point: full bridge, 350 Ohm
measuring points as full bridge clearly visible for inspection purposes. • calculation of the mechanical deforma-
Amplifier
• universal 1-channel measuring The measuring amplifier supplies the tions under tension, bending and tor- a) strain gauge arrangement on the tension bar (full bridge),
• measuring range: ±2mV/V
bridge supply voltage, and displays the sion b) full bridge circuit: 1 display, 2 amplifier, 3 active strain gauge
amplifier • resolution: 1µV/V
load-dependent “bridge detuning” digit- • correlation between mechanical strain
• zero balancing adjustment range: ±1mV
ally in voltage values. The digital display and electrical resistance in a strain
Strain gauges are used extensively in • supply voltage: 10VDC
also features a zero balancing function gauge
sensor systems to detect forces, mo- to allow for any preloading. • with FL 100.01, FL 100.02,
ments and deformations. FL 100.03: determination of the modu- Frame opening WxH: 480x450mm
The various elements of the experiment lus of elasticity for various materials
The FL 100 experimental unit provides a are clearly laid-out and housed securely from the measuring data of a tensile LxWxH: 560x410x610mm (frame)
wide-ranging introduction to the funda- in a storage system. test LxWxH: 600x400x320mm (storage system)
mentals of measurement by strain Weight: approx. 20kg
gauges. Three test specimens for ten- Three additional tension bars are avail-
sion, bending and torsion are each fitted able as accessories, in brass Required for operation
with four strain gauge measuring points. (FL 100.01), copper (FL 100.02) and
The strain gauges are wired in the full aluminium (FL 100.03), enabling the 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
bridge. The specimens are loaded incre- modulus of elasticity to be ascertained 1 phase
mentally allowing for the strain reading in experiments.
to be sequentially monitored. Scope of delivery
Layout of a strain gauge measuring point: 1 cover sheet, 2 adhesive, 3 component, 4 sub-
strat, 5 gauge measuring grid
1 frame
3 strain gauge test specimens
2 sets of weights
2 hexagon socket wrenches
1 measuring amplifier with strain gauge connect-
ing cable
1 storage system with foam inlay
1 set of instructional material
Order number 021.10000
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
122 123
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 102 FL 102
Determining the gauge factor of strain gauges Determining the gauge factor of strain gauges
Specification
Technical data
1 base frame, 2 handwheel, 3 connection to measuring amplifier, 4 bending bar, 5 strain
gauge measuring point, 6 spindle, 7 dial gauge, 8 fixture for dial gauge, 9 cross-arm
Bending bar made of steel: 660x25x12mm
Amplifier
• measuring range: ±2mV/V
• resolution: 1µV/V
Description Learning objectives/experiments • zero balancing adjustment range: ±1mV
• supply voltage: 10VDC
• measurement of deflection and In the experiment, a bar is mounted on • fundamentals of measurement using
strain ball bearings at two points, thereby per- strain gauges Dial gauge
• determination of the gauge factor mitting purely bending stress to be ap- • measurement of deflection using a dial • 0…20mm
of strain gauges plied. The bar is placed under load by gauge • graduation: 0,01mm
means of a spindle and the resulting de- • determination of the gauge factor of
As universal aids to experimental stress flection is recorded by a dial gauge. As a strain gauges Force and bending moment characteristic on the bending bar:
LxWxH: 660x200x430mm
and strain analysis, strain gauges enable result, the deformation can be read-off black: applied force, red: support reactions
Weight: approx. 20kg
mechanical strain to be converted into directly. At the same time the strain on
electrical signals. The signal obtained is the surface of the bar is recorded by
two strain gauges on the compression Scope of delivery
processed by a strain measuring amplifi-
er to give a display of the resulting side and two on the tension side. The
strain gauges are wired in the full 1 experimental unit
strain. 1 fixture
bridge. The measuring amplifier supplies
the bridge supply voltage, and displays 1 measuring amplifier
It is expected that the quantity meas-
the load-dependent “bridge detuning” di- 1 hexagon socket wrench
ured by a measuring device and the
readout subsequently indicated are gitally in voltage values. The digital dis- 1 set of instructional material
identical. Consequently, the planning and play also features a zero balancing func-
tion to allow for any preloading. Order number 021.10200
evaluation of measurements makes al-
lowance for the sensitivity to elongation
(gauge factor) of strain gauges. A key The unknown gauge factor, as a key
character value of strain gauges – the characteristic, can then be calculated
gauge factor – indicates the correlation from the deflection ascertained by the
between the strain and the change in strain gauge measurements.
resistance. 1 strain gauge on top of bar (compression side), 2 strain gauge on underside of bar (ten-
Practical fundamentals, such as gauge
sion side), 3 bending bar, 4 dial gauge;
The FL 102 experimental unit is used to application and configuration to form a M b bending moment, F applied force
measure deformation by means of a dial measuring bridge, can be easily integ-
gauge and at the same time to measure rated into the overall teaching concept.
strain by means of four strain gauges in
full bridge configuration. The gauge
factor of the strain gauges is then calcu-
lated arithmetically from the measure-
ments.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
124 125
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
Experimental stress and strain analysis
SE 110.21 FL 120
Forces in various single plane trusses Stress and strain analysis on a membrane
• touchscreen
SE 110.22 FL 130 operation
Forces in an overdeterminate truss Stress and strain analysis on a thin-walled cylinder • the measured
values are
displayed on the
unit or on a PC USB
126 127
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 152 FL 152
Multi-channel measuring amplifier Multi-channel measuring amplifier
Specification
Amplifier
• number of input channels: 16
• 16 input channels for processing FL 152 is a multi-channel measuring • amplification and display of signals LxWxH: 230x200x120mm
of analogue strain gauge measur- amplifier which supplies the strain from strain gauge measuring points Weight: approx. 2kg
ing signals, easy connection by gauge bridge circuits with power and • processing of measured values on
multi-pin input port processes the received measuring sig- computer
Required for operation
• integrated software for evalu- nals. The measuring amplifier includes • evaluation of stress and strain analysis
16 input channels. The strain gauge experiments, in conjunction with: Application software for stress and strain analysis based on the example of the FL 120
ation of stress and strain analys- 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
measuring points are connected to as- FL 120, FL 130, FL 140 (stress and strain analysis on a membrane)
1 phase
is experiments (FL 120, FL 130, sociated balance potentiometers by a • evaluation of experiments relating to
FL 140) and experiments relating 68-pin multiport. forces in trusses, in conjunction with:
to forces in trusses (SE 130, Scope of delivery
SE 130, SE 110.21, SE 110.22
SE 110.21, SE 110.22) The multi-channel measuring amplifier is
1 multi-channel measuring amplifier
operated via touchscreen or via PC us-
Stresses and strains occurring in com- ing the supplied software. The measured 1 software CD
ponents are determined in experimental values can be read and saved on com- 1 USB cable
stress and strain analysis by measuring puter (using an application such as 1 instruction manual
strain. In industry, strain is often recor- MS Excel).
Order number 021.15200
ded by strain gauges. Since strain
gauges deliver only small analogue
measuring signals, the signals must be
amplified in measuring amplifiers. Then
they are converted into digital pulses
and displayed as measured strain.
These strains may also be evaluated and
processed on computer.
Example application: FL 152 in conjunction with FL 130 (stress and strain analysis on a thin-
walled cylinder)
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
128 129
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 120 FL 120
Stress and strain analysis on a membrane Stress and strain analysis on a membrane
Specification
Aluminium disk
• outer diameter: D=230mm
• diameter used in the experiment: D=200mm
x • thickness: 3mm
• deflection and strain of a mem- Strains on the surface of the membrane • measure radial and tangential strain Dial gauge
brane under compressive load are recorded by strain gauges. The lay- using strain gauges • 0…20mm
• membrane with strain gauge ap- out of the strain gauges at optimally se- • measure deflection using a dial gauge • graduation: 0,01mm
plication lected points provides a comprehensive • calculate the stresses from the meas-
• determine radial and tangential view of the stresses and strains over ured strains: radial stress, tangential Manometer
the entire disk. The maximum stresses stress Strain gauge layout on the disk: 1 strain gauge measuring points, 2 disk, 3 wiring, • 0…1bar
stress profiles from measured
and strains are calculated by applying • determine direction of principal stress red: strains in the radial direction; blue: strains in the tangential direction, green: shear • accuracy: class 1,0
strains the law of elasticity. • application of Mohr’s strain circle to
determine the principal strains System pressure
In experimental stress and strain analys- The strain gauge measurements are re- • fundamental principle: using strain
is, strain gauges are used to determine • max. 0,6bar
corded and displayed by means of the gauge technology to measure strains
stresses and strains in components and FL 152 measuring amplifier. The meas-
structures. The maximum stresses and ured values can be imported into the ap- LxWxH: 700x350x350mm
strains are key variables in terms of its plication software for visualisation to Weight: approx. 25kg
structure, and ultimately dictate the di- evaluate the experiment.
mensions of a component. Strain Scope of delivery
gauges provide the means required to At the same time, the deflection of the
evaluate mechanical stress and strains. membrane is measured by a dial gauge. 1 experimental unit
The dial gauge can be moved along a 1 set of instructional material
The FL 120 experimental unit can be cross-member, enabling measurements
used to measure the deflection and Order number 021.12000
to be taken at any radius.
strain of a disk under different com-
pressive loads. For this purpose, a thin
disk, also called a membrane or dia-
phragm, is clamped into place and sub- Application software for stress analysis: representation of the stress curve
jected to pressure. A cylinder with a
hand-operated piston generates pres-
sure in a maintenance-free hydraulic sys-
tem. This pressure is indicated on a
manometer.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
130 131
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 130 FL 130
Stress and strain analysis on a thin-walled cylinder Stress and strain analysis on a thin-walled cylinder
Specification
Technical data
1 hand wheel for adjusting the piston, 2 vessel, 3 strain gauge measuring point, Aluminium vessel
4 manometer, 5 hydraulic cylinder with hydraulic pump, 6 port for FL 152 measuring ampli-
fier
• length: 400mm
• diameter: D=75mm
• wall thickness: 2,8mm
• internal pressure: max. 3,5N/mm2 (35bar)
• strain on a vessel under internal Internal pressure is generated inside the • measure strains with strain gauges Manometer
pressure vessel by a hydraulic pump. A manomet- • application of Mohr’s stress circle to • 0…40bar
• cylinder with strain gauge applic- er indicates the internal pressure. Strain determine the principal strain • accuracy: class 1,0
ation as vessel gauges are attached to the surface of • determine the principal stresses: axial
• uniaxial or biaxial stress state the vessel to record the strains. The and circumferential stresses by mag- LxWxH: 700x350x350mm
FL 152 measuring amplifier displays the nitude and direction Weight: approx. 21kg
shown in the experiment
measured values. The measured values · in an open vessel (pipe) a) Strain gauge layout on the vessel: 1 vessel, 2 strain gauge measuring points,
can be imported into the application · in a closed vessel (boiler) 3 wiring; σa stress in the direction of the vessel axis, σt stress in the circumferential direc-
Pipes, pressure vessels, steam boilers tion, pi internal pressure; Scope of delivery
software for visualisation to assist in the • comparison of open/closed vessels b) plane stress state in the wall: a axial direction, t circumferential direction,
etc. are considered as thin-walled ves- evaluation of the experiment. • determine Poisson’s ratio r radial direction
sels during design. The principal 1 experimental unit
• investigation of relations between
stresses are key variables in calculating Mohr’s stress circle is used to graphic- strains, pressure and stresses in a
1 set of instructional material
and designing these vessels. The ally represent the conversion of the plane biaxial stress state
stresses and strains occurring in a ves- Order number 021.13000
strain and to determine the principal
sel are not directly measured but are strains. The principal stresses are calcu-
determined by measuring the strains on lated from the principal strains by apply-
the surface using strain gauges. ing the law of elasticity.
The FL 130 experimental unit is used to
investigate stresses and strains in a thin-
walled vessel subjected to internal pres-
sure. The oil-filled vessel is closed with a
lid at one end and with a movable piston
at the other end. A hand wheel with a
threaded spindle is used to move the
piston. Two load cases are presented:
biaxial stress state of a closed vessel
such as a boiler tank and uniaxial stress Software screenshot FL 152: Mohr’s stress circle
state of an open vessel such as a pipe.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
132 133
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 140 FL 140
Stress and strain analysis on a thick-walled cylinder Stress and strain analysis on a thick-walled cylinder
Specification
Technical data
1 cylinder, 2 strain gauge measuring point, 3 pressure gauge, 4 hydraulic pump, 5 connec- Aluminium cylinder
tion for measuring amplifier FL 152
• length: 300mm
• diameter: d=140mm
• wall thickness: 50mm
• internal pressure: max. 7N/mm2 (70bar)
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
134 135
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 200 FL 200
Photoelastic experiments with a transmission polariscope Photoelastic experiments with a transmission polariscope
• together with the accessories or your [1] produce the mechanical stress curves through pho-
own models: toelastic experiments
· generate plane stress states in vari- [2] 2 linear polarising filters (polariser and analyser)
ous models under load: bending, [3] 2 quarter-wave filters for generating circular polar-
tensile load and compressive load ised light
· investigate stress distributions with [4] all filters have 360° angle scale and indicate the
linear or circular polarised light main optical axis
· interpret photoelastic fringe pat- [5] filters mounted on roller bearings and can be
terns: stress concentrations, zero pivoted
points, neutral strands, areas of con- [6] white light produced by a fluorescent tube and two
stant stress and stress gradients incandescent bulbs
· graphically and computationally de- [7] monochromatic light (yellow) generated by sodium
termine the stresses vapour lamp
[8] frame cross-members can be vertically adjusted
1 light source, 2 polarising filter as polariser, 3 quarter-wave filter, 4 frame for clamping [9] pressure or tensile forces generated by a threaded
and loading the models, 5 polarising filter as analyser, 6 quarter-wave filter, 7 model under spindle
load (FL 200.03)
[10] finished polycarbonate (PC) models available as ac-
cessories for the demonstration
Technical data
Light source
• lamp box with white diffuser
• for white light
· 1 fluorescent tube TL-E 32W/33 (colour: 33)
· 2 incandescent bulbs, candle lamp, frosted E14,
230V, 25W
• for monochromatic light (yellow)
· 1 sodium vapour lamp SOX 35, 35W
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
136 137
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
gunt gunt
Experimental stress and strain analysis
FL 210 FL 210
Photoelastic demonstration Photoelastic demonstration
• generate plane stress states in various [1] photoelastic experiments with an overhead polari-
models under load scope
· compressive load [2] polariser and analyser each comprise a polarising
· tensile load filter and a quarter-wave filter
• investigate stress distributions with lin- [3] filter enclosed, with stress-free glazing
ear and circular polarised light [4] all filters arbitrarily rotatable in the horizontal plane
• interpret photoelastic fringe patterns [5] linear or circular polarised light possible
· stress distribution [6] green filter for monochromatic light
· stress concentration [7] load application device with force gauge for pres-
sure and tensile load
[8] eight different polycarbonate models are delivered
[9] storage system for parts
Technical data
1 green filter, 2 analyser, 3 polariser, 4 overhead projector (FL 210.01), 5 frame, 6 load
application device with force gauge, 7 plastic model
Filter bracket with polariser and analyser.
Diameter of filters: D=165mm
1 green filter, diameter: D=150mm
8 models, PC
• unnotched bar
• bar with hole
• bar notched on one side
• bar notched on both sides
• rectangle without recesses
• rectangle with recesses
• fork
• crane hook
a) Model under bending load, stress profile
The illustration shows the FL 210 device with a normal overhead projector, which is not part of the scope of de- b) Model under tensile load, stress profile LxWxH: 500x190x30mm (frame)
livery. LxWxH: 280x280x90mm (filter bracket)
Weight: approx. 8kg
Description LxWxH: 1170x480x178mm (storage system)
• demonstration unit as an attach- Various transparent plastic models are Additional models are also available to Scope of delivery
ment for an overhead projector mounted inside a frame. A load applica- represent stress profiles in roller bear-
• generate stress patterns with lin- tion device is used to apply pressure or ings, tooth flanks, screw connections 1 frame with load application device
ear or circular polarised light in tensile loads to the model under invest- and wrenches.
1 filter bracket with polariser and analyser
typical polycarbonate compon- igation through a spindle.
All parts of the experiment are clearly
1 green filter
ents 8 photoelastic models
An arrangement of polarising filters and laid out and securely housed in a stor-
• detect stress concentrations 1 storage system with foam inlay
quarter-wave filters generates either lin- age system.
ear or circular polarised light. A green fil- 1 set of instructional material
Photoelasticity can be used to demon- ter to generate monochromatic light is
strate stress profiles and stress con- Order number 021.21000
also part of the scope of delivery. The
centrations in component models. light source is an overhead projector
(e.g. FL 210.01).
The distribution of stress in plane, trans-
Schematic representation of the photoelastic demonstration:
parent bodies (plastic models) is invest- The use of monochromatic light pro- 1 light source, 2 polariser, 3 linear polarised light, 4 model under load, 5 light decomposed
igated using polarised light. Polarising fil- duces a system of dark and light stripes, into two components in the directions of the principal stresses, 6 analyser, 7 horizontal
ters represent the stress profiles in col- which reflect the distribution and mag- components of the light
our. The notching and point loading and nitude of mechanical stresses. The mod-
the criteria dictating component design els which belong to the scope of delivery
are clearly visualised. represent typical components, permit-
ting experimentation in relation to notch-
The FL 210 unit can be used with over- ing and point loading. The stress profiles
head projectors. shown on the model are identical to
those in real-world components.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
138 139
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
2 gunt
Engineering mechanics – strength of materials
Experimental stress and strain analysis
Models for photoelastic experiments with a transmission polariscope (FL 200) Models for photoelastic demonstrations and experiments under load (FL 200 and FL 210)
FL 200.05
FL 200.01 Set of three photoelastic
Set of five photoelastic models, comparison of
models notches
FL 200.06
FL 200.02 Model – stresses on
Model – arch, PC weld seams, PC
FL 200.03 FL 200.07
Model – crane hook, PC Model – wrench, PC
Models for photoelastic demonstrations with an overhead projector (FL 210) Tensile load with stress concentration on
cross-sectional contraction
Additional models as accessories Bending load with central force and cross-sectional contraction
140 141
Engineering mechanics and engineering design
gunt
3
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
KI 120 TM 161
Kinematic model: crank slider 147 Rod and gravity pendulum 172
KI 130 TM 162
Kinematic model: four-joint link 148 Bifilar/trifilar suspension of pendulums 173
KI 140 TM 163
Kinematic model: Whitworth quick return mechanism 149 Torsional vibrations 174
KI 150 TM 164
Kinematic model: Hooke’s coupling 150 Coil spring vibrations 175
KI 160 Overview
Kinematic model: Ackermann steering mechanism 151 TM 150 Vibration trainer 176
GL 105 TM 150
Kinematic model: gear drive 152 Vibration trainer 178
TM 150.20
System for data acquisition 180
TM 610
Rotational inertia 154
TM 611
Rolling disk on inclined plane 155
TM 612
Kinetic model: flywheel 156
GL 210
Dynamic behaviour of multistage spur gears 158
GL 212
Dynamic behaviour of multistage planetary gears 160
TM 630
Gyroscope 164
TM 605
Coriolis force 166
TM 632
Centrifugal governor 168
142 143
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
Introduction
Basic knowledge
Kinematics and kinetics
Dynamics Kinetics
While statics deals with bodies in equilibrium, i.e. which are at rest or moving with Kinetics studies movements under the influence of forces; therefore, the cause of the motion is taken into consideration. To describe
constant velocity, dynamics deals with the accelerated motion of a body caused the spatial and temporal evolution of a mechanical system acted on by external forces, we use equations of motion. These generally
by forces. As such, time plays a key role in dynamics. In dynamics, both the forces comprise a system of second-order differential equations.
acting on a body and the resulting motions of the body are considered. Knowledge
of dynamics is needed in all areas of mechanical engineering. Kinetics are primarily based on Newton’s laws of motion
1st law: principle or law of inertia 3rd law: principle of reaction or interaction
Without external force, a body remains at rest or in rec- Reaction forces between two mass points are equal in magni-
tilinear uniform motion. Inertia: the body only changes tude, opposite in direction and collinear.
its state of motion under the action of an external force.
actio = reactio
2nd law: principle of action
The acting force and the acceleration achieved are proportional
to each other. The ratio of the acting force to the acceleration
Dynamics comprises kinetics and kinematics. In practice, the difference achieved is constant for every body and equals its mass.
between kinematics and kinetics is the way of looking at the same machine or
component. Kinematic questions only consider the geometry of the motion.
Kinetics also takes into account the cause of the motion. Fundamental law of dynamics: Newton’s fundamental law: ∑F=m·a
force = mass · acceleration
The aim of dynamics is to calculate the stress and strain on components or F=m·a
systems in order to be able to design them.
144 145
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinematics
KI 110 KI 120
Kinematic model: crank mechanism Kinematic model: crank slider
• crank mechanism with fixed and oscil- • conversion of a uniform rotary motion
lating cylinder into a purely harmonic reciprocating
motion
Specification • influence of crank length and input
angle on the output stroke
[1] investigation of a crank mechanism • recording the transmission function of
[2] adjustment of the crank radius at a crank slider
three positions of the crank on the
crank disk Specification
[3] adjustment of the angle by turning
the crank disk [1] investigation of a crank slider
[4] measure the stroke on the cylinder [2] generation and investigation of
[5] pivoting cylinder can be blocked to purely harmonic stroke movements
study the crank mechanism with [3] adjustment of the crank radius at
either a fixed or oscillating cylinder three positions of the connecting rod
on the crank disk
Technical data [4] adjustment of the angle by turning
the crank disk
Crank disk [5] measure the stroke on the cylinder
• anodised aluminium
• mounted on ball bearings Technical data
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
146 147
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinematics
KI 130 KI 140
Kinematic model: four-joint link Kinematic model: Whitworth quick return mechanism
The experimental unit comprises the 1 kinematic model The KI 140 unit generates non-uniform
drive disk with the crank and coupling 1 set of instructional material stroke movement by means of a Whit-
and the output disk with the rocker. The worth mechanism. The experimental
elements are connected to each other Order number 041.13000 unit comprises the drive disk with crank
via pivot joints. The positions of the pivot and coupling, the driving rod and the cyl-
joints can be varied to adjust the crank inder.
radius, oscillation radius and coupling
length. The drive disk can be driven by
the crank.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
148 149
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinematics
KI 150 KI 160
Kinematic model: Hooke's coupling Kinematic model: Ackermann steering mechanism
The KI 150 unit can be used to study a The KI 160 unit can be used to study a The elements are mounted on a base
universal joint shaft. A universal joint is steering trapezoid. The experimental plate, which can also be mounted on a
also known as Hooke’s coupling. The ex- unit comprises two track rods with drag wall.
perimental unit comprises two universal link, two track-rod arms and two steer-
joints with intermediate shafts. The ar- ing pins, where, in theory, the wheels are
rangement of the universal joints and attached. The length of the axis corres-
the deflection angle can be set using ponds to the distance between the
two rotary disks on the base plate. steering pins.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
150 151
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinematics
GL 105 GL 105
Kinematic model: gear drive Kinematic model: gear drive
Specification
Technical data
Gears
• quantity: 4
• plastic
• module: 1mm
1 fixed axle, 2 additional axles arranged at any point, 3 rail, 4 handle, 5 storage box, 6 rail • number of teeth: 40, 60, 80 and 100
lock, 7 gears, 8 bearing
LxWxH: 380x120x100mm
Weight: approx. 3kg
Scope of delivery
1 kinematic model
1 set of instructional material
Order number 030.10500
Description Learning objectives/experiments
• investigation of single-stage and The rail is locked in experiments with • investigation of single-stage or
multistage spur gears spur gears. Depending on the aim of the multistage spur gears
• investigation of planetary gears experiment, one or two additional axles • investigation of planetary gears
can be positioned on the rail. The gears • determine the transmission ratio
The gear is the element of a machine can be coupled to each other via driving
that transmits and transforms motion. pins or to the fixed axle. It is driven by Experimental setup with locked rail and two additional axles
A gear comprises at least one drive, an hand. The full revolutions are counted to Gear with intermediate wheel: driving wheel (40 teeth), intermediate wheel (80 teeth), driv-
determine the transmission ratio. en wheel (100 teeth)
output and a frame.
Gear drives are uniform translation To investigate planetary gears, the rail is
gears. The rotary motion is transferred released and pivoted about the fixed
from one shaft to a second through pos- axle. The rail serves as a planetary wheel
itive transmission by gears. support on which the planetary wheels
are positioned and represents the input
In spur gears, the gears are mounted on of the gear. The sun wheel forms the
parallel axles. The drive and the output output of the gear. It is driven by hand.
shaft are arranged in parallel. Planetary The transmission ratio can be determ-
gears are a type of spur gears, in which ined by counting the full revolutions.
the drive and the output shafts are on
the same axle.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
152 153
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinetics: basic experiments on dynamics and moment of inertia
TM 610 TM 611
Rotational inertia Rolling disk on inclined plane
• investigation of the inertia of rigid bod- • proof of the law of falling bodies on the
ies in rotational motion inclined plane
• determine mass moments of inertia of • influence of the mass of a body on its
different, regularly shaped bodies acceleration
• investigation of the mass moment of • determine the mass moment of inertia
inertia as a function of the radius by rolling experiment and pendulum ex-
periment
Specification • Steiner’s theorem
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
154 155
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinetics: basic experiments on dynamics and moment of inertia
TM 612 VORLAGE
Kinetic model: flywheel Momentengleichgewicht am zweiarmigen Hebel
Visit
ated rotational motion ured and compared to the times for oth- Scope of delivery gewichts und Anwendung des He- und Gewichte aufgebracht. Durch Ver-
er weights. belgesetzes schieben der Gewichte wird ein Gleich- Artikel-Nummer 049.04900
The resistance with which a rigid body 1 experimental unit gewicht eingestellt. Abstände vom Dreh-
opposes a change to its rotation is indic- The mass moment of inertia of the fly- 1 set of weights Mit EM 049 werden am Beispiel eines punkt, die Hebelarme, können auf einer
our website
ated by the mass moment of inertia. It is wheel is calculated from the measured 1 set of instructional material zweiarmigen Hebels die Grundlagen des integrierten Skala abgelesen werden.
a measure of the inertia of a body in ro- time, the mass of the flywheel and the Momentengleichgewichts untersucht. Die Berechnung der Hebelarme wird im
tation. Using the TM 612 kinetic model, acceleration distance. Order number 040.61200 Auftretende Momente am Hebel sollen Versuch überprüft.
we can conduct basic experiments on ins Gleichgewicht gebracht werden.
uniformly accelerated rotational motion. The experimental unit is designed to be Eine Standsäule trägt den Hebel, eine
fixed to a wall. Ein mittig gelagerter Balken stellt einen stabile Grundplatte gewährleistet siche-
The experimental unit comprises a fly- zweiarmigen Hebel dar. Auf den Hebel ren Stand.
wheel with shaft, a cable and a set of On our website you will find all you need to know,
weights. The shaft forms the axis of including all the latest news.
rotation in the centre of gravity of the fly-
wheel. It is mounted on two bearings.
One end of the cable is attached to the
shaft. A weight is attached to the other
end. The attached weight sets the fly-
wheel in a uniformly accelerated motion.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15 - 17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
156 157
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 Wir behalten uns das Recht vor, technische Änderungen ohne Ankündigung vorzunehmen. Seite 1/1 - 08.2016
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinetics: basic experiments on dynamics and moment of inertia
GL 210 GL 210
Dynamic behaviour of multistage spur gears Dynamic behaviour of multistage spur gears
• determining the angular acceleration [1] investigation of the dynamic behaviour of 1-stage,
on gears 2-stage or 3-stage spur gears
• determining the mass moment of iner- [2] 4 shafts, 3 drive wheels and 3 drivegears
tia of the gear [3] shafts can be coupled by coupling pins
• determining the friction [4] optional attachable flywheels to increase the rota-
• determining the gear efficiency tional inertia on each shaft
[5] gear is accelerated via cable drum and variable set
of weights
[6] weight raised by hand crank; ratchet prevents acci-
dental release
[7] clamping roller freewheel enables free further rota-
tion after the weight has been released
[8] gear decelerated via hand-operated brake
[9] transparent protective cover with safety lock and
1 set of weights, 2 speed sensor, 3 flywheels, 4 drivegear, 5 protective cover, 6 cable protective grill for the set of weights
drum, 7 hand crank [10] inductive speed sensors on all drivegears
[11] GUNT software for data capture via USB under
Windows
Technical data
Drive
• set of weights: 5…50kg
• drop height: max. 0,65m
x 2E • max. potential energy: 320Nm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
158 159
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinetics: basic experiments on dynamics and moment of inertia
GL 212 GL 212
Dynamic behaviour of multistage planetary gears Dynamic behaviour of multistage planetary gears
• determine the transmission ratio for a [1] investigation of the dynamic behaviour of a 2-stage
locked gear planetary gear
• measure transmitted forces for a [2] three planet gears per stage
locked gear [3] four different transmission ratios possible
• gear acceleration under constant driv- [4] gear is accelerated via cable drum and variable set
ing torque of weights
• influence of the transmission ratio [5] weight raised by hand crank; ratchet prevents acci-
• determine reduced mass moment of dental release
inertia [6] clamping roller freewheel enables free further rota-
• conversion of potential energy into kin- tion after the weight has been released
etic energy [7] shock absorber for weight
• determine friction [8] transparent protective cover
• determine gear efficiency [9] force measurement on different gear stages via
3 bending bars, display via dial gauges
1 dial gauge, 2 bending beam, 3 set of weights, 4 set of weights for measuring transmis- [10] inductive speed sensors
sion ratios, 5 planetary gear, 6 hand crank, 7 protective cover [11] GUNT software for data capture via USB under
Windows
Technical data
Drive
• set of weights: 5…50kg
• max. potential energy: 245,3Nm
x 2E Load at standstill
• weight forces: 5…70N
Layout of a planetary gear: 1 ring gear, 2 sun gear, 3 sun gear shaft, 4 planet carrier
The illustration shows a similar unit. shaft, 5 planet carrier, 6 planet gear Measuring range
• speed: 0…2000min-1
Description
LxWxH: 950x750x1700mm
• two-stage planetary gears with The GL 212 unit allows the investigation To be able to determine the effective Weight: approx. 150kg
three planet gears each of the dynamic behaviour of a two-stage torques, the force measurement meas-
• four different transmissions can planetary gear. The trainer consists of ures the deflection of bending beams. In- Required for operation
be configured two planet gear sets, each with three ductive speed sensors on all drive gears
• bending beams to measure force planet gears. The ring gear of the first allow the speeds to be measured. The 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
• inductive speed sensors for stage is coupled to the planet carrier of measured values are transmitted dir- 1 phase
the second stage. By fixing individual ectly to a PC via USB. The data acquisi-
speed-time diagrams to determ- gears, it is possible to configure a total tion software is included. The angular ac-
ine the angular acceleration Scope of delivery
of four different transmission ratios. The celeration can be read from the dia-
gear is accelerated via a cable drum and grams. Effective mass moments of iner- 1 trainer
The planetary gear is a special type of a variable set of weights. The set of tia are determined by the angular accel-
gear drive, in which the multiple planet 2 sets of weights
weights is raised via a crank. A ratchet eration. 1 CD with GUNT software + USB cable
gears revolve around a centrally ar- prevents the weight from accidentally
ranged sun gear. The planet gears are 1 set of instructional material
escaping. A clamping roller freewheel Principle of operation of a 2-stage planetary gear: 1 output shaft, 2 cable drum, 3 drive
mounted on a planet carrier and engage enables free further rotation after the shaft, green: sun gears, yellow: planet gears, blue: ring gears, n speed Order number 030.21200
positively in an internally toothed ring weight has been released. The weight is
gear. Torque and power are distributed caught by a shock absorber. A transpar-
among several planet gears. Sun gear, ent protective cover prevents accidental
planet carrier and ring gear may either contact with the rotating parts.
be driving, driven or fixed. Planetary
gears are used in automotive construc-
tion and shipbuilding, as well as for sta-
tionary use in turbines and general
mechanical engineering.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
160 161
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinetics: dynamics of rotation
TM 600 TM 600
Centrifugal force Centrifugal force
Specification
Orbit
• orbital radii: 25mm, 50mm, 75mm, 100mm, 125mm
• max. velocity: 6,5m/s
Drive motor
• max. power: 35W
Description Learning objectives/experiments • max. speed: 6000min-1
• laws of the behaviour of rotating The speed, also displayed digitally, of the • investigation of the centrifugal force as Measuring ranges
masses controlled drive motor can be continu- a function of • speed: 0…500min-1
ously adjusted. A transparent protective · the speed • force: 0…25N, resolution 0,1N
Centrifugal force occurs in the motion of cover above the rotating arm ensures · the size of the rotating mass
a rigid body on an orbit and is the inertia safety: operation is only possible when · the rotation radius
LxWxH: 420x400x270mm
force, which acts with a direction away the protective cover is properly at- Principle of force measurement with force-proportional deformation:
Weight: approx. 23kg
from the centre of rotation. The counter tached. 1 mass, 2 rotating arm, 3 member, 4 bending beam, 5 position sensor , 6 member;
r radius, w deformation
force associated with the inertial force Required for operation
is the centripetal force. Both forces are
of equal magnitude and opposite in dir- 230V, 50Hz, 1 phase
ection. Centrifugal forces occur in all ro-
tating machinery such as turbines and Scope of delivery
must be controlled to prevent damage
to machine elements. 1 experimental unit
1 set of tool and weights
The TM 600 unit can be used to study
centrifugal forces under various condi-
1 set of instructional material
tions. The core of the experimental Order number 040.60000
unit is a rotating arm on a vertical rota-
tion axis. Different masses are attached
to the arm. The orbital radius can be set
via the position of the mass on the arm.
There are three different masses avail-
able. The occurring centrifugal force is
transferred from the arm to a bending Dependence of centrifugal force on the speed green: calculated values, red: measured val-
beam. The force-proportional deforma- ues; F centrifugal force, n speed
tion is detected via an electronic meas-
uring system and displayed digitally.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
162 163
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinetics: dynamics of rotation
TM 630 TM 630
Gyroscope Gyroscope
Specification
Technical data
Gyro
• drive motor power: 3,6W
1 protective cover, 2 gyro drive motor, 3 speed displays and adjustment for of the horizont- • moment of inertia of the spinning top: 375gcm2
al gyro axis and the vertical precession axis, 4 spinning top flywheel mass, 5 lever, 6 sliding
weight, 7 inner frame
• speed of the rotation axis: 1000…6000min-1
• gyroscopic moment: 0…61Nmm
Precession
• drive motor power: 19W
• speed of precession axis: 5…63min-1
LxWxH: 420x400x310mm
Weight: approx. 22kg
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
164 165
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinetics: dynamics of rotation
TM 605 TM 605
Coriolis force Coriolis force
Specification
Technical data
Rotating arm
• continuously adjustable speed: 0…60min-1
1 pump, 2 water tank, 3 speed display, 4 switch for direction of rotation, 5 speed adjust- • adjustable direction of rotation
ment, 6 rotating arm, 7 water jet
Submersible pump
• flow rate: 10L/min
LxWxH: 420x400x320mm
Weight: approx. 25kg
Effect of the Coriolis force: A starting point of the moving mass, Fc Coriolis force; orange: ro-
tating reference frame, red: direction of the Coriolis force, green: current motion of the
mass, dashed blue: direction of movement without rotation, blue: actual direction of move-
ment with rotation
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
166 167
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Kinetics: dynamics of rotation
TM 632 TM 632
Centrifugal governor Centrifugal governor
Specification
Technical data
1 spring, 2 Hartnell governor centrifugal system, 3 control element for adjusting speed,
4 speed display, 5 centrifugal mass
DC motor
• max. power: 35W
Speed control: 60…400min-1
Proell governor
• sleeve mass: 3x 100g
• centrifugal mass: 2x 150g
Porter governor
• sleeve mass: 3x 100g
Description Learning objectives/experiments • centrifugal mass: 2x 400g
• visualisation of the effect of cent- The TM 632 experimental unit presents • kinetics and kinematics of the following Hartnell governor
rifugal force centrifugal systems that demonstrate centrifugal systems • centrifugal mass: 2x 400g
• how various centrifugal systems the different principles of operation of · Porter governor • 2 compression springs, adjustable spring preload
work both weight and spring-based gov- · Proell governor
• determination of characteristic ernors. · Hartnell governor
Measuring range
• adjustment of centrifugal governors Different centrifugal systems: A Porter governor, B Hartnell governor, C Proell governor
curves and setting curves of dif- • speed: 0…600min-1
The housing holds the drive with an elec- • recording the governor characteristic
ferent centrifugal governors tronically controlled motor. The speed is curves and setting curves
continuously adjustable with a 10-turn • calculation of the structural design and LxWxH: 420x415x430mm
Centrifugal governors use the proper- potentiometer and displayed digitally. adjustment of different governors Weight: approx. 30kg
ties of centrifugal force to control the The governors are inserted into a chuck
speed of a machine. Due to centrifugal on the drive. Centrifugal masses, sleeve Required for operation
force, a rotating flyweight mass has the forces and spring preload can be varied
tendency to move away from the axis of using the accessories supplied, depend- 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase
rotation and is prevented by counteract- ing on the governor. The stroke can be
ing mechanisms. These mechanisms read on markings on the governor shaft. Scope of delivery
are differentiated into those governors A transparent protective cover above
that use weights and those that use the rotating centrifugal governor en- 1 experimental unit
springs. Corresponding kinematics sures safety: operation is only possible 3 centrifugal governors
cause a deflection proportional to the when the protective cover is properly at- 1 set of tools and weights
speed to occur on the governor. Via an tached. 1 set of instructional materials
actuator, this affects the energy sup-
plied to the machine, thereby controlling Order number 040.63200
the machine’s speed. Settings and characteristic of the Hartnell governor at constant centrifugal force lever arm:
a centrifugal mass adjustment, l centrifugal force lever arm, n speed, x spring preload;
green increasing speed, red decreasing speed
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
168 169
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
Vibrations
Basic knowledge
Vibrations
Vibration is the process occurring when a physical quantity When the system continues to vibrate with a constant ampli-
periodically changes depending on time. This is associated with tude, the vibration is referred to as undamped motion. Without
Undamped harmonic motion
a conversion of energy from one form to another. further addition of energy, each vibration is damped more or
less strongly, i.e. its amplitude decreases. If the course of the
In the case of mechanical vibrations, periodic potential energy is The characteristic variables of an undamped
vibration can be described by a sinusoidal function, we call the
converted into kinetic energy and the reverse. Every mechanical harmonic motion are illustrated in the
vibration a harmonic motion.
vibration is an unevenly accelerated motion. It arises due to the diagram using the example of a spring
addition of energy to a vibratory system, e.g. a pendulum, which pendulum. The velocity is calculated via the
has force applied to it. first derivative, the acceleration using the
second derivative:
y(t)
ω
Characteristic variables of a vibration
ŷ
ŷ y
Elongation y = y(t) Rest φ y T/4 T/2 T Time t in sec
Characteristic Formula Technical description position π/2 π 2π Phase angle
variable (symbol) y = ˆ
y · sinφ -ŷ φ in radians
Elongation y = y(t) Momentary distance of the vibrating body from the rest or
(deflection) equilibrium position
v(t)
ŷω
φv
Amplitude ˆy oder ym Maximum value of elongation
Velocity v = y ŷ v
Time t in sec
v = ˆ
y · ω · cosφ φ
Frequency f = 1/t Number of vibrations per unit of time t Phase angle
v = ˆ
v · cos φ φ in radians
a(t)
Angular frequency ω=2·π·f Angular velocity of a circular motion, whose projection results in Acceleration a = y ŷ a
a harmonic oscillation, indicates the exceeded phase angle of the φ
vibration per time period ˆ · ω2 · sinφ
a = -y Time t in sec
a Phase angle
a = -y · ω2 φ in radians
Natural frequency Frequency at which the system oscillates in the natural mode
after a single excitation Elongation ˆ
y = Angle of rotation ε = ˆ
ε · sinφ
Velocity ˆ
v = y = Angular velocity ε = ˆ
ε · ω · cosφ
Damping Removal of the amplitude in the course of a vibration Acceleration ˆ
a = y = Angular acceleration ε = ˆ
ε · ω2 · sinφ
170 171
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Vibrations
TM 161 TM 162
Rod and gravity pendulum Bifilar/trifilar suspension of pendulums
• oscillation period of gravity and rod • influence of thread length on the oscil-
pendulum lation period
• determine centre of gravity on the rod • determine the mass moment of inertia
pendulum
• reduced pendulum length and centre Specification
of inertia of the rod pendulum
[1] investigation of the vibration beha-
Specification viour of various pendulum bodies in
bifilar and trifilar suspension
[1] experiments on pendulum swings, [2] investigation of a mathematical pen-
comparison of physical and mathem- dulum (bifilar) and a physical pendu-
atical pendulums lum (trifilar)
[2] rod pendulum as physical pendulum, [3] choice of three pendulum bodies:
made of metal and mounted on knife- beam, cylinder, circular ring
edge bearing [4] change the thread length with a
[3] knife-edge bearing mounted to slide clamping device
on the rod to effectively vary the pen- [5] stopwatch to measure the oscillation
dulum length period
[4] weight for the rod pendulum, sliding [6] determine the mass moment of iner-
[5] gravity pendulum as a mathematical tia
pendulum [7] bracket for wall mounting
[6] adjustable length of the gravity pen-
dulum Technical data
[7] stopwatch to measure the oscillation
period Pendulum bodies
[8] bracket for wall mounting • beam
· LxWxH: 40x40x160mm
Technical data · mass: 2kg
• cylinder
Gravity pendulum · diameter: 160mm
• length: up to 2000mm · height: 19mm
• nylon rope · mass: 3kg
• weight • circular ring
· diameter: 50mm · outer diameter: 160mm
· mass: 0,52kg · inner diameter: 100mm
Description Description · height: 41mm
Rod pendulum · mass: 4kg
• investigation of pendulum swings The TM 161 unit is used to study pendu- • length:1000mm • ideal mathematical pendulum can The TM 162 unit can be used to study
• comparing physical and mathem- lum swings. A gravity pendulum (math- • diameter: 8mm be demonstrated pendulum swings with bifilar or trifilar Thread length: up to 2000mm
atical pendulums ematical pendulum) and a rod pendulum • mass: 0,39kg • moment of inertia in an experi- suspension. A beam, a cylinder or a cir-
(as a physical pendulum) are compared • pendulum weight ment on a rotary pendulum cular ring are used as pendulum bodies.
Stopwatch: 1/100s
Pendulums perform oscillations. Gravity to each other. The unit contains a metal · diameter: 50mm The length of the threads can be adjus-
produces the restoring moment. We rod with a movable auxiliary mass as the · mass: 0,49kg In a bifilar suspension, the pendulum ted using clamping devices. The mo-
rod pendulum. The suspension point can ments of inertia of the pendulum body LxWxH: 205x200x2000mm
distinguish between mathematical and body is suspended over two threads.
be adjusted on the knife-edge bearing of can be calculated from the measured Weight: approx. 12kg
physical pendulums. A mathematical Stopwatch: 1/100s The pendulum body oscillates in a plane
pendulum describes an idealised gravity the pendulum. The length of the gravity purely translationally without rotation. oscillation period. The oscillation period
pendulum. In physical pendulums, the pendulum can be easily changed using a This kind of pendulum can be considered can be varied by changing the thread Scope of delivery
clamping device. LxWxH: 250x80x2000mm length.
shape and size of the pendulum body is as a mathematical pendulum. In a trifilar
Weight: approx. 5kg 1 experimental unit
taken into account. Both are theoretical suspension with three threads, the pen-
models for the description of a real pen- The experimental unit is designed to be dulum body is set in a torsional vibration. The experimental unit is designed to be 1 set of instructional material
dulum. fixed to a wall. Scope of delivery The torsional vibration can be used to fixed to a wall.
Order number 040.16200
determine the moment of inertia by ex-
1 experimental unit periment.
1 set of instructional material
Order number 040.16100
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
172 173
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Vibrations
TM 163 TM 164
Torsional vibrations Coil spring vibrations
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
174 175
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
Vibrations
• analysis of vibration signals on a PC gunt TM 150.20 – BASED EVALUATION SOFTWARE & INSTRUMENTATION KIT
Torsional vibrations play a key role in drive systems and must be controlled
to avoid damage. The TM 150.02 accessories set can be used to produce
• frequency and phase response curves
free and damped torsional vibrations and to study the effects of torsional
• all principal functions of a digital storage oscilloscope stiffness, mass and damping on frequency and amplitude.
• frequency spectra of the signals The range of experiments includes
gunt TM 150.20 – FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND CHART
• torsional stiffness
• comprising software, a displacement sensor,
• mass moment of inertia
a reference sensor and an interface box
• free torsional vibrations
• the interface box supplies up to three sensors, prepares • damped torsional vibrations
their measuring signals for the PC • oscillator with several masses
and offers them to three analogue
outputs for display
176 177
3 gunt
Engineering mechanics – dynamics
gunt gunt
Vibrations
TM 150 TM 150
Vibration trainer Vibration trainer
• experiments with pendulums [1] vibration trainer with experiments on damping, res-
· Kater’s pendulum onance, dual-mass system and vibration absorption
· reduced pendulum length [2] 6 pendulum oscillators, 2 bar-type oscillators and
· spring-mass system 1 spring-mass oscillator
• bar-type oscillator [3] electrical imbalance exciter
· undamped oscillation [4] control unit for the imbalance exciter with a digital
· damped oscillation frequency display and a TTL output for triggering ex-
· forced vibration ternal devices
• damped and undamped resonance [5] tuneable absorber with a leaf spring
• absorber effect in multi-mass oscillat- [6] adjustable oil damper
ors [7] electrically operated drum recorder for recording
free vibrations
[8] polar chart recorder for determining the amplitude
and phase of forced vibrations
1 pendulum bearing, 2 bar-type oscillator, 3 container for oil damper, 4 control unit for im-
balance exciter, 5 storage for additional pendulums, 6 imbalance exciter, 7 drum recorder,
8 spring
Technical data
Imbalance exciter
• 0…50Hz
• 100cmg
x Absorber
• leaf spring: WxH: 20x1,5mm
1 rod pendulum, 2 wooden pendulum with adjustable additional mass, 3 gravity pendulum,
• total mass: approx. 1,1kg
4 bifilar suspended gravity pendulum with additional masses • tuneable: 5…50Hz
gunt gunt
Vibrations
TM 150.20 SE 110.58
System for data acquisition Free vibrations in a bending beam
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
180 181
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
Engineering mechanics and engineering design
gunt
4
Machine dynamics
Machine dynamics
TM 625 PT 501
Elastic shafts 198 Roller bearing faults 220
TM 620.20 Overview
Vibrations in machines System for data acquisition 200 PT 500 Machinery diagnostic system 222
TM 155 PT 500
Free and forced vibrations 188 Machinery diagnostic system, base unit 224
HM 159.11 PT 500.05
Natural vibration on a ship model 194 Brake & load unit 230
PT 500.10
Mass forces and mass balance Elastic shaft kit 232
TM 180 PT 500.11
Forces in reciprocating engines 206 Crack detection in rotating shaft kit 234
GL 112 PT 500.12
Investigation of cam mechanisms 208 Roller bearing faults kit 236
PT 500.13
Couplings kit 238
PT 500.14
Vibration isolation Belt drive kit 240
TM 182 PT 500.15
Vibrations on machine foundations 210 Damage to gears kit 242
TM 182.01 PT 500.16
Piston compressor for TM 182 212 Crank mechanism kit 244
PT 500.17
Cavitation in pumps kit 246
PT 500.18
Vibrations in fans kit 248
PT 500.19
Electromechanical vibrations kit 250
182 183
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
Introduction
Basic knowledge
Machine dynamics
y(t)
Resonance
with amplitude peaking
Machine dynamics play a prominent role in modern mechanical engineering. The requirements of lightweight construction and ever
greater power-to-weight ratios make machines particularly susceptible to harmful vibrations. Machine dynamics provide ways and Measures to avoid vibration problems
means to address these problems.
Vibrations should be combated at the
source wherever possible. Thus, the
procedure should follow the priorities
What are machine dynamics? When do vibration problems occur? presented here:
• minimise excitation forces by
Machine dynamics refer to the study of a system’s motion based Vibration problems may occur if the following two conditions balancing or mass balancing
on the forces acting on the system. are met:
• prevent propagation of the forces by
Machine dynamics apply knowledge of engineering mechanics, • periodic excitation forces isolating the vibrations or absorbing
especially dynamics, to the problems of real machines. The effect • vibratory system the vibrations
of inertia and the occurrence of vibrations play a major role here. • reduce vibratory capacity of the
Machine dynamics make it possible to predict the vibrational system by making the components
behaviour of a machine and, where possible, to compensate it. !(¡{
1 more rigid, applying additional mass
Depending on the task, the vibrations may be desired (shakers, or using dampers
vibrating conveyors) or undesired (engines, turbines).
Rotating or Mass, flexibility
Methods from vibration measuring technology are used to swinging masses and low damping
!(¡{
2
assess and evaluate vibrations. There are also close links to the generate periodic create an
fields of engineering design, machine elements and drive sys- excitation forces vibratory system
tems.
!(¡{
4
!(¡{
3
Excitation of
vibrations with Minimising undesired vibrations using the example of a ship’s engine system:
possible
1 diesel engine equipped with mass balancing,
resonance 2 balanced generator, 3 spring-loaded support for vibration isolation,
4 reinforced ship structure to make the system more rigid
184 185
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
Introduction
Basic knowledge
Machine dynamics
In machine dynamics, real machines are represented by the- vibratory systems and for the sources of excitation forces.
oretical models. More often than not, however, machines are Using these mathematical models, it is relatively quick and easy Reciprocating engines
very complicated and not easy to calculate. By simplification to predict the behaviour of the machine.
and abstraction, mathematical models can be obtained for both Machine dynamics play an important role in reciprocating
engines. Various inertia forces are produced by large back-
and-forth and rotating masses. These forces can cause con-
siderable vibration problems in a poor design. The resulting
Linear vibratory system with one or more inertia forces can be kept small by distributing the masses
degrees of freedom over several cylinders, suitable kinematic ratios and the
The simplest model of an vibratory system is the spring- arrangement of balancing masses. This enables a low-vibra-
mass system. This model provides many insights into tion operation of the reciprocating engine.
the behaviour of an vibratory system. Often the rigidity Crank mechanism
and mass distributions of a real system can be described
sufficiently well by using concentrated point masses and
inertia-free springs.
Cam mechanism
Spring-mass system Cam mechanisms are used to convert a rotating motion
into a back-and-forth motion. Cam mechanisms are used
as a valve drive in engines or in packing machines. Poorly
designed cam mechanisms produce high accelerations
and inertia forces. This results in vibrations and noise. The
Continuous vibratory system application of machine dynamics allows a design with the
Similarly, simple systems exist for continuous vibration lowest possible loads and vibrations.
systems such as a ship’s hull. In this case, a simple-beam
Camshaft with roller plunger
model provides initial indications of the vibratory behaviour
when excited by ocean waves. Natural frequencies and
their associated natural modes are of interest here.
186 187
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Vibrations in machines
TM 155 TM 155
Free and forced vibrations Free and forced vibrations
Specification
1 imbalance exciter, 2 rigid bar as discrete oscillator, 3 damper, 4 control unit for imbal- Technical data
ance exciter, 5 drum recorder for recording vibrations, 6 suspension and vibration spring
Coil springs
• 0,75N/mm
x • 1,5N/mm
• 3,0N/mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
188 189
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Vibrations in machines
VORLAGE
TM 150.02 TM 155.20
Momentengleichgewicht
Free amvibrations
and damped torsional zweiarmigen Hebel System for data acquisition
Lerninhalte/Übungen
Learning objectives/experiments Learning objectives/experiments
• natural
Grundlagen des Momentengleichge-
frequency of a rotary oscillator • supported experiments with TM 155
• influence of torsionalKräfte,
wichts: angreifende stiffness, mass
erzeugte · natural vibration of a bar-type oscil-
and damping
Momente und Gleichgewicht lator
• Wirkung von Kräften in Abhängigkeit · damped vibration of a bar-type oscil-
vom Hebelarm
Specification lator
· forced vibration of a bar-type oscillat-
[1]Spezifikationen
supplementary experiment for tor- or (damped and undamped reson-
sional vibrations for the TM 150 and ance)
[1] Untersuchung des Momentengleich-
TM 155 vibration trainers · frequency and period time measure-
[2] gewichts ambars
3 torsion zweiarmigen Hebel
with different diamet- ments
[2] kugelgelagerter Balken effective
ers, freely selectable mit integrier-
length
[3] tem Maßstabmass
3 different als zweiarmiger Hebel
disks with clamping Specification
VORLAGE [3] stabiler,
chuck standfester Rahmen aus
[4] Metall
3 with ball bearings and clamping [1] data analysis for TM 155
[4] Aufbewahrungssystem
chuck für die Teile [2] measurement, recording and analys-
[5] oil damper for damped vibrations is of frequency response and trans-
[6]Technische
recorder for recording the vibrations
Daten fer function
in TM 150/TM 155 [3] function as digital storage oscillo-
Balken scope
• Technical data
LxBxH: 600x30x10mm, mittig kugel- [4] interface box with 3 sensor inputs,
gelagert 3 analogue outputs
• Hebellänge:
Torsion 2x 300mm
bars, stainless steel [5] 1 inductive displacement sensor
•
Gewichte
diameter: 3mm, 5mm, 6mm (amplitude), 2 reference sensors (ex-
• length:
3x 1N (Hänger)
800mm citer force)
• 6x 5N [6] GUNT software for data acquisition
• 12xdisks
Mass 1N via USB under Windows
• small: D=150mm approx. 2,7kg
LxBxH:
• large:600x300x410mm
D=228mm approx. 4,8kg Technical data
Gewicht: ca. 10kg
Aufbewahrungssystem:
Clamping chuck: D=0,5…8,0mm x Sensor input channels: 3
LxBxH: 200x70x40mm Inputs in oscilloscope mode: 2
LxBxH: 95x68x35mm Time basis: 10 … 750ms/DIV
LxWxH: approx. 480x240x1180mm (as-
sembled) Record length: 2000 points
Lieferumfang
Weight: approx. 33kg
Beschreibung
Description 1 Versuchsgerät Description Displacement sensors
1 Scope
Satz of delivery
Gewichte
• measuring range: 5…10mm
• influence
Grundlagen ofdes
mass, torsional rigid-
Momentengleich- werden
The verschiebbare
rigidity of the torsionReiter
barsgesetzt
can be 1 Satz didaktisches Begleitmaterial • measurement and illustration of In addition to the software, a displace- • frequency range: 0…50Hz
gewichts
ity und Anwendung
and damping des He-
on the behaviour und Gewichte
adjusted aufgebracht.
by selecting Durch Ver-
the effective length 1 experimental unit frequency and phase response ment sensor and a reference sensor,
belgesetzes
of a rotary oscillator schieben
of the bar,der Gewichte
such that thewird ein Gleich-
natural fre- Artikel-Nummer
1 049.04900
set of instructional material • digital storage oscilloscope the system also includes an interface LxWxH: 265x260x110mm (interface
gewichtofeingestellt.
quency Abstände
the torsional vom
vibration can Dreh-
be box. The box supplies up to three box)
Mit EM 049 werdenplay
am aBeispiel eines punkt, diewithin
adjusted Hebelarme, können auf einer
wide limits. Order number 040.15002 sensors, prepares their measuring sig- Weight: approx. 7kg
Torsional vibrations major role in This system for data acquisition is an ad-
zweiarmigen Hebels die Grundlagen des
drive systems. Selecting an inappropri- integrierten Skala abgelesen werden. dition to the experimental unit TM 155 nals for the PC and offers them to three LxWxH: 600x400x170mm (storage sys-
Momentengleichgewichts untersucht.
ate natural frequency can lead to reson- Die Berechnung
Bearings and massderdisks
Hebelarme wird im
are clamped and makes it possible to analyse vibra- analogue outputs for display. tem)
Auftretende Momente
ance phenomena, whichamin Hebel
some sollen
circum- Versuch
to überprüft.
positions on the torsion bars using tion signals on a PC. Frequency and
ins Gleichgewicht
stances may lead gebracht
to seriouswerden.
damage. clamping chucks. An oil damper is used phase response curves can be easily All components of the system are ready Scope of delivery
Eine
to Standsäule
display damped trägt den Hebel,
vibrations. The eine
vibra- generated, saved and output using this at hand and securely housed in a stor-
Ein
Themittig gelagerter
TM 150.02 unit Balken
can be stellt
used einen
to pro- stabileare
tions Grundplatte
recorded on gewährleistet
the siche- system. The system also offers all the age system. 1 GUNT software CD + USB cable
zweiarmigen
duce free torsional vibrations andHebel
Hebel dar. Auf den to ren 150/TM
TM Stand. 155 recorder. essential functions of a digital storage 1 interface box
study the effects of torsional stiffness, oscilloscope and can calculate the fre- 1 displacement sensor
mass and damping on frequency and quency spectra of the signals. 2 reference sensors (exciter force)
amplitude. The accessory kit is designed 1 cable set
to be installed in the TM 150 or 1 storage system
TM 155 vibration trainers.
1 manual
The accessory kit contains three differ- Order number 040.15520
ent torsion bars and two different mass
disks with which to create torsional vi-
brations.
gunt gunt
Vibrations in machines
TM 140 TM 140
Rotational vibrations Rotational vibrations
Specification
Torsion bar
• 1300mm
• D=6mm
x • stainless steel
Mass disks
Description Learning objectives/experiments • D=150mm, approx. 2,7kg
• D=228mm, approx. 4,8kg
• investigation of torsional stiff- A damper makes it possible to set differ- • determine the torsional stiffness of a
ness and torsional vibrations ent degrees of damping. The torsional vi- torsion bar Exciter frequency: 1…20Hz
• behaviour of two-mass and three- brations are picked up via rotary en- • determine the mass moments of iner-
mass torsional oscillators coders on the bearings of the torsion tia Damper coefficient: 0,25…3,5Nm/rad/s
bar and are available on the control unit • decay behaviour of torsional vibrations
Torsional vibrations are often observed as an electrical signal. All signals are • determine the damping in torsional vi- Crankshaft as an example of a torsional oscillator
also available via a USB port and can be brations LxWxH: 1400x410x400mm
in belt-driven systems. With appropriate Weight: approx. 50kg
excitation of resonances, large vibration transferred to a PC. • forced torsional vibrations, resonance
amplitudes can occur, which can lead to
• torsional vibration systems with mul-
The GUNT software allows the signals to tiple masses Required for operation
strong loads on shafts and gears, poten-
tially resulting in damage. be recorded and analysed, for example · two-mass torsional oscillator
recording a resonance curve or display- · three-mass torsional oscillator 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
ing the natural mode. 1 phase
The TM 140 unit can be used to pro-
duce free and forced torsional vibrations Scope of delivery
and to study the effects of torsional stiff-
ness, mass and damping on frequency 1 experimental unit
and amplitude.
4 bearing units
The core of the experimental unit is a
1 torsion bar
metal torsion bar. Mass disks with differ- 3 mass disks
ent rotational inertias can be attached 1 exciter
to the bar using clamping chucks. This 1 rotational damper
allows a torsional vibration system to be 1 control unit
Example oscillograph: left – torsional vibration of a torsion bar with mass disk, weakly
created with up to three masses. The damped; right – the same vibration with strong damping 1 set of cables
torsional stiffness can be adjusted by 1 hexagon screwdriver SW4
varying the effective bar length. An ex- 1 CD with GUNT software + USB cable
citer unit driven by an electric motor is 1 set of instructional material
used to represent forced vibrations. The
frequency can be adjusted and read on Order number 040.14000
the control unit.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
192 193
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Vibrations in machines
HM 159.11 HM 159.11
Natural vibration on a ship model Natural vibration on a ship model
Specification
Technical data
Vibration exciter
• electrodynamic type with permanent magnet
• max. force: 8,9N
• frequency range: 5…12000Hz
Description Learning objectives/experiments Function generator
• adjustable frequency, amplitude and offset
• dynamic behaviour of a ship The model ship is attached to a rigid • measure and record natural frequen- • output: 0…10Vss, 50 Ohm
structure cross-member by springs. The enclosed cies and modes of the model ship Acceleration sensor
• simple ship form simplifies the box cross-section with high rigidity (in air) • measuring range: ±5g
mathematical approach means the natural frequency of the • vibration behaviour of the model ship • frequency range: 0…400Hz
• different excitation signals pos- cross-member is negligibly high. in air
• comparison between theory (approxim- Model ship
sible
An electrodynamic vibration exciter ation formula for determining the first Elongation y of the vibration, shown over the length L of the model ship • deck stringer with fastening holes for sensors and
• optional excitation and measuring blue: first order natural frequency, red: second order natural frequency
causes the model ship to vibrate. A func- bending frequency) and practice suspension
points tion generator produces the excitation (measured natural frequency)
signal, which can be adjusted in amp- • influence of discrete additional masses
Nowadays, experiment-based vibration LxWxH: 1800x400x1700mm (frame)
litude and frequency. An arbitrarily posi- or ballast on natural frequency and
analysis is an essential component in LxWxH: 1200x200x150mm (model ship)
tionable acceleration sensor measures mode (ballast and extra weights not in-
shipbuilding design and development. Weight: approx. 50kg
the model’s response to the excitation cluded)
signal. In this manner, the transfer func- • vibration behaviour of floating model
The HM 159.11 unit helps students tions for various points of the model ship ship (possible with additional tank) Required for operation
take their first steps in the field of exper- can be generated step by step. These
imental vibration analysis or modal ana- 230V, 50Hz, 1 phase
can be used to determine the vibration
lysis of structures. Using this trainer, the modes for various natural frequencies.
dynamic behaviour of a ship structure is Experiments can also be conducted in Scope of delivery
studied, teaching students the funda- water.
mentals of experimental vibration analys- 1 experimental unit
is. An additional tank is required to conduct 1 model ship
these experiments (not included). Com- 4 springs
The HM 159.11 unit can be used to plementary experiments can be conduc- 1 measuring amplifier
measure and record the natural fre- ted with additional ballast and weights. 1 power amplifier
quencies and modes of a model ship. 1 blue: first order natural frequency, 2 red: second order natural frequency
1 vibration exciter
The simple, idealised ship shape makes 1 function generator
it easier to approach the problem math-
2 multimeters
ematically. The plastic model ship has
nine ribs and an elliptical line plan. 1 acceleration sensors
1 set of cables
1 set of instructional material
Order number 070.15911
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
194 195
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Rotor dynamics
TM 620 TM 620
Bending elasticity in rotors Bending elasticity in rotors
Specification
1 switch box, 2 motor, 3 inductive speed sensor, 4 flexible coupling, 5 mass disk, 6 rotor, Technical data
7 protective cover, 8 safety bearing, 9 self-aligning ball bearing
Three-phase motor
• power: 0,25kW
• max. speed: 3000min-1
Rotor
• L=500mm
• D=6mm
• high tensile steel
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
196 197
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Rotor dynamics
TM 625 TM 625
Elastic shafts Elastic shafts
Specification
6 shafts
• D: 3mm, 6mm, 7mm
• L: 600mm, 900mm
• high-tensile steel
Mass, disk-shaped
• D: 80mm
• m: 965g
Description Learning objectives/experiments • high-tensile steel
• investigation of the natural The TM 625 experimental unit can be • investigation of a Laval rotor Motor
modes of various shafts with con- used to study the natural modes of · critical speed • power: 0,25kW
tinuous mass distribution and of these different models. Illustrative exper- · self-alignment • max. speed: 6000min-1
a Laval rotor iments are used to explain resonance • natural modes on a shaft with continu- • speed electronically controlled
• optimal visibility and simultan- and the supercritical or subcritical ous mass distribution with
states of a vibrating system. Six shafts · different bearing clearances Vibration behaviour of a Laval rotor: n speed, A amplitude, nc critical speed with resonance, Shaft bearing
eous protection thanks to trans-
of different lengths and diameters are · different shaft diameters shaded area: subcritical speed, red shaded area: supercritical speed with self-centring • 4x self-aligning ball bearings
parent protective cover available. The shafts can be mounted on · different shaft lengths • 3x safety bearings
four self-aligning ball bearings and fitted
The terms “critical speed” and “reson- with a mass disk to construct a Laval ro-
ance” are often used when referring to Measuring ranges
tor. The axial positions are read on a • speed: 0…6000min-1
rotating systems. Resonance occurs scale mounted parallel to the shaft. A
when the natural frequency and the ex- • scale for clearance measurement: 0…1000mm
three-phase motor drives the shaft via a
citation frequency match. The natural flexible coupling. The electronically con-
frequency of an oscillatory system is trolled speed can be selected via two po- LxWxH: 1550x380x450mm
that frequency at which the system os- tentiometers and is continuously vari- Weight: approx. 65kg
cillates with the associated natural able. It is displayed digitally.
mode after a single excitation. Operation Required for operation
at critical speed can damage the system A transparent protective cover and
because of the high vibration amp- safety bearing ensure safe operation. 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
litudes. In order to study the phenomen- 1 phase
on of shaft vibration in more detail, there The measured values can be displayed
are two simplified calculation models. In and analysed on a PC using the optional Scope of delivery
the first case, the mass of the elastic TM 620.20 unit for data acquisition.
shaft is evenly distributed along its Natural modes of a shaft with continuous mass distribution: a) first natural mode, b) second 1 experimental unit
length. In the second case, the shaft natural mode, c) third natural mode; red: amplitude of the vibration, blue: position of the
safety bearing; L clearance of the shaft bearing
6 shafts
consists of massless, elastic shaft sec- 1 set of tools
tions and the masses are combined into 1 set of instructional material
discrete mass disks.
Order number 040.62500
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
198 199
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Rotor dynamics
TM 620.20 TM 620.20
System for data acquisition System for data acquisition
Specification
Technical data
2 displacement sensors
• measuring principle: inductive, non-contact
• output signal: analogue 1…9V
• measuring distance: 5…10mm
1 measuring amplifier and A-D converter, 2 USB output to PC, 3 speed sensor, 4 inductive • measuring velocity: <1,5mm/ms
displacement sensor, 5 TM 620 experimental unit
Measuring amplifier
• 4 input signals
• 4 analogue output channels via BNC
• A-D converter
x • output signal via USB
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
200 201
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Balancing
TM 170 TM 170
Balancing apparatus Balancing apparatus
Specification
Technical data
Measuring range
1 variable weight, 2 pulley, 3 shaft, 4 imbalance masses, 5 angular scale, 6 drive belt,
7 foundation with elastic bearing
• speed: 0…1400min-1
LxWxH: 420x400x380mm
Weight: approx. 26kg
Scope of delivery
Description Learning objectives/experiments
1 experimental unit
• representation of the fundament- The main element of the experimental • demonstration of imbalance vibrations
unit is a smooth shaft to which four vari- at different speeds 1 set of tool and weights
al processes involved in balancing
able imbalance masses are attached at • comparison of static, dynamic or gen- 1 set of instructional material
• static and dynamic imbalance
any angular and longitudinal position. eral imbalance Order number 040.17000
Imbalances on rotating machines are of- The shaft is mounted on ball bearings. It • determine an imbalance
ten the cause of disruptive vibrations is driven by a variable-speed electric mo- • perform a balancing operation 1 static imbalance, 2 dynamic imbalance; S centre of gravity; blue: mass distribution,
and noise. During imbalance, the princip- tor and a belt. The speed of the shaft is red: principal axis of inertia
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
202 203
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Balancing
PT 502 PT 502
Field balancing Field balancing
Specification
Technical data
x Flywheels
• 2x mass: 1,675kg
• radius for balancing weights: 60mm
The illustration shows PT 502 without transparent protective cover.
• angular division: 15°
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
204 205
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Mass forces and mass balance
TM 180 TM 180
Forces in reciprocating engines Forces in reciprocating engines
Specification
Technical data
1 piston, 2 cylinder, 3 crankshaft, 4 foundation plate, 5 display and control unit, 6 force
sensor, 7 drive motor
Engine
• number of cylinders: 4
• piston mass: 40g
• additional mass: 41g
x Crank drive
• mass of connecting rod: 18g
• centre distance of cylinders: 35mm
• crank radius: 15mm
• length of connecting rod: 70mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Measuring ranges
• investigation of free mass forces The engine model comprises pistons • effect of mass forces • speed: 100 … 3000min-1
and moments of a reciprocating with plastic slide bushes. The slide · mass forces in dependence on the • force: 0…500N
engine bushes do not require lubrication. For speed
• continuous adjustment of the each cylinder, the angle between cranks · mass forces in dependence on the LxWxH: 420x370x350mm (model)
angle between cranks can be adjusted continuously. As an aid, piston mass Weight: approx. 40kg
• simulation of single, two- or four- marks are provided at 0°, 90°, 180° · first and second order mass forces Left: definition of the rotating (m ROT) and oscillating (m OSC) masses at the crank LxWxH: 230x230x80mm (display and control unit)
and 270°. • comparison of different crank drives drive, right: possible configurations of the crankshaft: red: single cylinder, blue: two-cylinder,
Weight: approx. 1kg
cylinder engines · 4-cylinder, symmetrical, 180° angle green: four-cylinder
The oscillating masses can be varied by between cranks
Every reciprocating engine generates Required for operation
using additional weights at the pistons. · 4-cylinder, non-symmetrical, 90°
mass forces. The mass forces of the os- The four-throw crankshaft is driven by a angle between cranks
cillating masses cannot be com- 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 50Hz/CSA,
DC motor and a synchronous belt. The · 2-cylinder, 180° angle between 1 phase
pensated completely, while the mass speed is electronically controlled and di- cranks
forces of the rotating masses are fully gitally displayed. The free forces and mo- · single cylinder
compensated. By using several cylinders Scope of delivery
ments are recorded by force sensors
it is possible that the forces com- placed at the support of the model. All
pensate each other. However, disturbing 1 engine model
electronic functions are integrated in
moments may still occur. the display and control unit. The display 1 display and control unit
and control unit also contains the USB 1 GUNT software CD + USB cable
The experimental unit TM 180 enables interface for data acquisition. 1 set of instructional material
investigation of the free masses and mo-
ments of a reciprocating engine with a Order number 040.18000
The GUNT software enables the detailed
single cylinder, with two cylinders or with evaluation of the signals of forces and
four cylinders. moments.
Left: effect of the oscillating (blue, FOSC) and the rotating (green, FROT) mass forces and their
vectorial addition to the free mass force (red, FU).
Right: mass forces course during a crankshaft revolution
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
206 207
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Mass forces and mass balance
GL 112 GL 112
Investigation of cam mechanisms Investigation of cam mechanisms
Specification
Technical data
Drive motor
• DC asynchronous motor with frequency converter
• power: 250W
• speed: 60…670min-1
Cam-shaped cam member
• stroke, each: 15mm
• opening angle, each: 140°
Description Learning objectives/experiments Spring stiffness
• hard: 5,026N/m
• record elevation curves of cam By varying the spring stiffness, spring • elevation curves in non-matching enga- • medium: 2,601N/m
mechanisms preload and oscillating mass, it is pos- ging member • soft: 613N/m
• four different cam members, two sible to study the dynamic limits of the • elevation curve in sprung-engaging
different engaging members respective cams. The cam motions and member Masses
• influence of spring stiffness and valve raising can be clearly demon- • determine the limit speed and com- • additional weight: 200g
strated using a stroboscope (not in- pare with theory 1 engaging member (rolling receiver with plunger / flat receiver with plunger), 2 cam- • plunger: 530g
mass on the dynamic behaviour
cluded). • influence of moving mass on the mo- shaped cam member; a tangent cam with roller plunger, b circular arc cam with flat plun- • flat receiver: 93g
tion of cam member/plunger ger, c hollow cam with roller plunger
Cam mechanisms play an important role • rolling receiver: 20g
A recorder synchronised with the cam • influence of return-spring stiffness and
in the conversion of rotary motion into member records the actual elevation preload on the motion of cam mem-
oscillatory motion. The most common Recorder: toothed belt drive
curve of the cam mechanism. A speed- ber/plunger
application of cam mechanisms is the controlled drive motor with a large fly- • comparison of the elevation curves of
activation of valves in engines. This ap- wheel generates a speed as constant as different cam-member shapes LxWxH: 800x440x440mm (experimental unit)
plication is highly dynamic: valves must possible. The open design means that • comparison of elevation curves with LxWxH: 360x320x160mm (display and control unit)
be opened and closed in very quick suc- the motion is clearly visible in every de- theory Weight: approx. 68kg
cession. The contact between the valve tail.
and a cam must not be lost, otherwise it Required for operation
would result in uncontrolled oscillations, A transparent protective cover ensures
valve float and possible damage to the safe operation. The experimental unit is 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
engine. intended for demonstration in engineer- 1 phase
ing education. It is not suitable to be
The GL 112 experimental unit allows the used as a test bench in the field of en- Scope of delivery
dynamic investigation of a cam mechan- durance testing/tribology.
ism at various speeds. Four typical cams 1 experimental unit
with corresponding engaging members 1 display and control unit
are compared in terms of their motion Elevation curves; s stroke, α opening angle; blue: hollow cam, red: circular arc cam,
4 cam-shaped cam members
green: tangent cam
behaviour. The valve is simulated with a
2 engaging members
mass and a spring.
3 return springs
3 blocks of recorder paper
1 set of tools
1 set of instructional material
Order number 030.11200
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
208 209
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Vibration isolation
TM 182 TM 182
Vibrations on machine foundations Vibrations on machine foundations
Specification
Technical data
Drive motors
x • max. speed: 6000min-1
• max. torque: approx. 3,40Nm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
210 211
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Vibration isolation
TM 182.01 VORLAGE
Installation and
Piston compressor for TM 182 Momentengleichgewicht am zweiarmigen Hebel
commissioning
Learning objectives/experiments Lerninhalte/Übungen
Lieferumfang
Description Beschreibung
Guaranteed 1 Versuchsgerät
1 Satz Gewichte
• as a “real machine”, the piston
compressor generates vibrations
The TM 182.01 compressor is used as
a model of a “real machine” for the
trouble-free by werden
• Grundlagen des Momentengleich-
gewichts und Anwendung des He-
verschiebbare Reiter gesetzt
und Gewichte aufgebracht. Durch Ver-
1 Satz didaktisches Begleitmaterial
A piston compressor is a typical ma- ates vibrations on the foundation. The Mit EM 049 werden am Beispiel eines punkt, die Hebelarme, können auf einer
compressed air generation function is Have your
zweiarmigen new
Hebels die equipment
Grundlagen descommis- integrierten Skala abgelesen werden.
chine, on which imbalance and oscillat-
ing masses generate vibrations. Balan- not used. sioned by traineduntersucht.
Momentengleichgewichts expert personnel. Die Berechnung der Hebelarme wird im
cing the “machine” does not adequately Auftretende
Our highlyMomente am Hebel
qualified staffsollen Versuch
will gladly überprüft.
assist
reduce these vibrations. In this case, a The TM 182.01 is available as a com- ins Gleichgewicht gebracht werden.
plete assembly and consists of a single you. Eine Standsäule trägt den Hebel, eine
vibration isolating machine foundation
helps to avoid unwanted vibrations from cylinder compressor with integrated mo- Ein mittig gelagerter Balken
Commissioning stelltequipment
of the einen stabile Grundplatte gewährleistet siche-
being transmitted to the surroundings. tor. To generate vibrations with different zweiarmigen Hebel dar. Auf den Hebel ren Stand.
frequencies, the compressor is fitted includes the following services:
with a frequency converter.
• setup of equipment in the
laboratory
• connection to the laboratory’s
supply systems
• commissioning the equipment
• testing the equipment
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15 - 17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
212 213
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 Wir behalten uns das Recht vor, technische Änderungen ohne Ankündigung vorzunehmen. Seite 1/1 - 08.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
Machinery diagnosis
Machinery diagnosis
The aim of machinery diagnosis, also known as machinery status detected when it occurs. This increases the overall equipment
The significance of vibrations in machinery diagnosis
monitoring or condition monitoring system (CMS), is to c
onduct effectiveness (OEE), a measure of the added value of a plant, and
needs-based maintenance or repair and therefore to minimise optimises the cost structure.
The mechanical condition of a machine or its parts can be measuring signals requires a good understanding of the operat-
the repair and downtimes of a machine. Damage should be
assessed by the nature and extent of the vibrations produced. ing mechanisms and a certain amount of experience.
To do this, vibrations are recorded and analysed by sensors
and measuring instruments. The correct interpretation of the
What characterises the condition of a machine?
The following are some measurable state variables using the example of a diesel generator:
Causes of vibration Examples from practice for remedy
Piston ring nuts:
measurable wear 1. Circumferential or periodic forces from Elastic vibration-damping mount of the machine to
• pressing or punching prevent/minimise propagation of the vibration.
Exhaust gas: Cylinder: pressure
temperature, Cooling water: • jamming, alignment errors
exhaust temperature,
emissions, soot chemical
composition
2. Inertial forces due to rotating and Tyres are balanced to correct imbalances.
oscillating masses
• reciprocating pistons
• rotating imbalances
Generator:
current, voltage, Shaft:
electromagnetic speed, bearing,
radiation vibrations, 3. Plungers Preloaded bearings make it possible to align
occurrence the shaft precisely, increase the rigidity and reduce
• play in the contact points and thereby
of vibrations
changing contact surfaces in positive force the bearing clearance.
(imbalance)
transmission
Oil: fill level, age,
• contact loss in the case of non-positive force
temperature, transmission Good lubrication must be provided to minimise
pressure • rolling over faults in the surface damage to the gears and to prevent
Lines with con the occurrence of fault points in the surface.
necting points
and seals:
tightness Foundation:
noise, vibrations
4. Gas forces Forces occur in the crankcase from the transmission
• expansion due to the build up of dynamic of gas forces from the cylinder head to the crankshaft
gas forces and excitation of longitudinal and bearing. Stiffened crankcase and expanding screws
bending vibrations avoid vibrations and fatigue in the material.
Machinery diagnosis is used for Machinery diagnosis leads to • non-uniform rotation and excitation of
torsional vibrations
• weak-point analysis to optimise a process or to detect • increased and optimum use of the lifecycle of plant
expected errors in good time and machinery
• condition-based maintenance, e.g. the use of car tyres • improved operational safety 5. Flow forces When designing rotors, such as those for fans and
when these fail to meet the prescribed minimum tread depth • increased plant reliability • surfaces are excited by turbulence, with asso compressors, the number and shape of the rotors
• avoid or minimise failures thanks to pre-determined • optimised operating processes ciated pressure fluctuations in the form of must be taken into account relation to of the possible
maintenance, e.g. oil change in motor vehicle at a fixed interval positive surge waves (howling, noise, whis- occurrence of vibrations.
• reduced disturbances
or after a certain mileage tling); this is the opposite of sound radiation
• reduced costs
• periodic flow forces on blades
214 215
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
Machinery diagnosis
Machinery diagnosis
Internal forces and energies of the machine are of real inter- proper normal operation of the machine, others are amplified
Learning objectives
est for machine diagnostics. These variables cannot be mea- or produced by defects. By interpreting the measuring sig-
sured directly, but their effects – vibration – can. Vibration nals, we can assess the condition of the machine and identify
measurement and analysis allows a picture of these forces defects. Mechanical vibrations Causes, mechanisms of occurrence, imbalance, Laval rotor, resonance,
to be obtained. We can see the structure of the forces, their damping, shock
In machinery diagnosis we differentiate between characteristic-
causes and their behaviour over time from the vibration mea-
value monitoring and frequency analysis.
surements. The measuring signals are mostly frequency spec-
tra, which arise from superposition of various vibrations with Vibration measuring methods Measuring sensor, measuring amplifier, representation, oscilloscope, speed
different frequencies. Some of these vibrations are part of the measurement
216 217
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
Machinery diagnosis
Machinery diagnosis
Envelope analysis In balancing we try to bring the centre of gravity of the rotor determine the unknown imbalance. Since the imbalance cannot
back in line with the axis of rotation. To do this, weights are added be measured directly, it must be determined indirectly from the
Envelope analysis is used to identify, for example, damage to in a normal spectrum only with difficulty, or may even be impos-
to or removed from the rotor. In order to determine the position measurable bearing vibrations.
roller bearings and gears. The damage produces shocks with sible to identify. Envelope analysis demodulates the high-fre-
and size of the required balancing masses, it is first necessary to
very-high-frequency vibration components. The low shock fre- quency shock signal and allows the shock frequency to be
quency that is relevant for diagnosing damage can be identified measured.
Conduct FFT to obtain spectrum of the envelope. The speed (10 Hz) 10 Hz
and the shock frequency (35,8 Hz) can be seen clearly. 35,8 Hz 3. Identification of cracks in shafts
The sidebands spaced at the speed (35,8 -10, 35,8 +10)
indicate an amplitude modulation. This is evidence of damage Shafts with cracks produce a characteristic vibration signal a large speed range and studied in a special filter for different
to the outer ring with rotating load. 35,8 -10 35,8 +10 71,6 Hz
that can be used to identify the crack. One analysis method is orders of rotation-frequency.
tracking analysis, in which the vibration signal is recorded over
218 219
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 501 PT 501
Roller bearing faults Roller bearing faults
Specification
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
220 221
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.11 PT 500.16
Crack detection in rotating shaft kit Crank mechanism kit
Vibration behaviour of a Vibrations in crank mecha
cracked shaft, identification nisms, free inertia forces,
of the crack from the impacts and shocks due to
vibration signal bearing clearance and wear
PT 500.12 PT 500.17
Roller bearing faults kit Cavitation in pumps kit
Identification of bearing damage Noise and damage due
from the running noise, to cavitation, conditions for
different pre-damaged roller cavitation
bearings included
PT 500.13 PT 500.18
The core element of the training system is the PT 500 base unit. The components of the base
Couplings kit Vibrations in fans kit
unit, together with the PT 500.04 computerised vibration analyser, allow a series of experiments Properties of different coupling Vibrations in fans,
on the topic of machinery diagnostics. In addition, the PT 500.10 – PT 500.19 accessory sets are types, influence of axial and demonstration of vibration
available to simulate different, reproducible types of damage. In addition to pure measuring exer- radial runout and pitch error excitation by blade passage,
cises on vibration measurement (measuring deflection, velocity and acceleration of the vibration on vibration behaviour influence of gyroscopic effect
in the time or frequency domain), it is possible to practice field balancing on rigid rotors and the
alignment of shafts. Almost any topic in machinery diagnostics can be covered thanks to a wide
range of accessories. PT 500.14 PT 500.19
A complete summary of all Belt drive kit Electromechanical vibrations kit
options of the modular The base unit contains a vibration-damped fixing plate, a speed-controlled drive motor with a Vibrations on belt drives, Interaction in an electro
system can be found in our tachometer, a shaft with two mass disks and two bearing units, a coupling and balancing weights. resonance and critical speeds, magnetic-mechanical system,
PT 500 brochure, which influence of belt tension, influence of load, air gap geome-
is available for download radial runout and alignment try and electrical asymmetry
at www.gunt.de.
222 223
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500 PT 500
Machinery diagnostic system, base unit Machinery diagnostic system, base unit
Specification
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
224 225
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500-Classification PT 500.01
Experimentation kits and required/optional components Laboratory trolley
Specification
Components
Technical data
Laboratory trolley
Elastic shaft kit
LxWxH: 1100x770x820mm
PT 500.04
PT 500.05
PT 500.01
Weight: approx. 39kg
PT 500.10
PT 500.14
PT 500.12
PT 500.15
PT 500
Scope of delivery
Experiments 1 trolley, complete
PT 500.11
Crack detection in rotating shaft kit
PT 500.12
Roller bearing faults kit
PT 500.13
Couplings kit
PT 500.14 The illustration shows PT 500.01 together with the base plate with protective hood from the base unit PT 500.
Belt drive kit
PT 500.15 Description
Damage to gears kit
• trolley for base unit
• 4 castors guarantee mobility
PT 500.16
Crank mechanism kit
This laboratory trolley together with the
PT 500 base unit permits the construc-
PT 500.17 tion of a mobile experimental unit. The
Cavitation in pumps kit trolley features two shelves on which
measuring units and other accessories
can be placed. The sturdy trolley struc-
PT 500.18 ture is manufactured from anodised alu-
Vibrations in fans kit minium section. The shelves are made
from anodised aluminium sheet.
PT 500.19
Electromechanical vibrations kit
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
226 227
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.04 PT 500.04
Computerised vibration analyser Computerised vibration analyser
Specification
Technical data
x Acceleration sensors
• frequency range: 1…10000Hz
• sensitivity: 100mV/g
• resonance frequency: 32kHz
Optical speed sensor
Description Learning objectives/experiments • sampling width: 3…150mm
• laser class II, 675nm
• versatile, powerful software for The software permits various analytical • within the context of the experiments Measuring amplifier
vibration analysis methods to be applied to a vibration sig- in the complete PT 500 series, the fol- • adjustable gain: x1, x10, x100
• supports all machinery diagnosis nal and compared in terms of their effic- lowing learning can be covered: • powered by 12VDC power supply unit
experiments of the PT 500 series acy. This enables the advantages and · familiarisation with vibration signals • LxWxH: 230x220x80mm
• suitable for field balancing of ro- disadvantages of the various techniques · correct application of FFT analysis USB box
tors in one and two planes to be effectively discovered. The balan- · measurement of speed, vibration dis- Application of the sensors: acceleration sensor on the black bearing support, speed sensor • 16x analogue in, 2x analogue out
cing process is presented step-by-step. placement, vibration velocity and ac- with holder • each 4x digital in/out
The computerised vibration analyser celeration
was developed specially to support ana- The software features an intuitive user · assessment of the vibration state of LxWxH: 600x400x220mm (storage system)
lysis of machinery diagnosis experiments interface, and is highly user-friendly. An a machine Weight: approx. 6kg
of the PT 500 series. The analyser can online help function provides guidance · damage analysis of roller bearings
also be used in many other vibration ex- on the various functions. Measuring res- and gears by means of envelope
Required for operation
periments (such as TM 150). ults can be printed out. spectra
· detection of cracks in shafts by 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
The system comprises two acceleration Cables, brackets and fixings are sup- means of run-up curves and order 1 phase
sensors, a measuring amplifier with ad- plied. analysis
justable gain, a USB box and the analysis · measurement of imbalance vibra-
Scope of delivery
software. tions and field balancing of rigid ro-
tors in 1 and 2 planes
2 acceleration sensors
The analysis software offers the follow-
1 speed sensor with holder
ing features: two-channel oscilloscope
for investigations in the time range; two- 1 amplifier
channel spectrum analyser for investiga- 1 CD with evaluation software
tions in the frequency range; vibration 1 USB box + data cable
measuring unit; envelope analysis for The illustration shows all components of PT 500.04 1 combination wrench, AF 13
bump effects and roller bearing damage; 1 storage system with foam inlay
travelling filter to record run-up curves; 1 manual
orbit display; and a balancing module for
Order number 052.50004
field balancing of rigid rotors in one and
two planes.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
228 229
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.05 PT 500.05
Brake & load unit Brake & load unit
Specification
Technical data
1 magnetic particle brake, 2 fan, 3 shaft for direct connection of brake, 4 belt drive, 5 shaft Continuous braking power: approx. 450W/3000min-1
for connection of brake via belt drive
Transmission ratio between brake shafts: i=3
The illustration shows PT 500.05 together with PT 500, PT 500.01, PT 500.15 and
PT 500.04.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
230 231
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.10 PT 500.10
Elastic shaft kit Elastic shaft kit
Specification
Technical data
Elastic shaft
1 elastic shaft, 2 bearing, 3 safety bearing, 4 bores for displacement sensors, 5 bearing • min. diameter: D=10mm
block with pendulum ball bearing, 6 bores for acceleration sensors
• diameter at bearings: D=20mm
• length: 530mm
• nominal length between bearings: 450mm
Scope of delivery
1 elastic shaft
Description Learning objectives/experiments 2 bearing blocks
1 safety bearing
• flexural vibration of the elastic The accessory setup is mounted on the • familiarisation with the terms “critical 1 storage system with foam inlay
shaft base plate of the machinery diagnostic speed” and “resonance”
• influence of unbalanced excitation 1 manual
• resonance and critical speed PT 500 base system.
• alignment of the elastic rotor Order number 052.50010
This accessory setup enables the re- To measure and evaluate the experi- • influence of alignment errors
sponse of an elastic rotor to unbalanced ment, the computerised vibration analys- • understanding and interpreting fre- The illustration shows PT 500.10 together with PT 500, PT 500.01 and PT 500.04.
excitation to be studied. The subcritical, er PT 500.04 and two displacement quency spectra
supercritical and resonance running sensors PT 500.41 are required. It in- • use of a computerised vibration analys-
states can be demonstrated. A compar- cludes all the necessary sensors, a er
ison of the orbits (path curves) in the measuring amplifier and analysis soft- • together with two displacement
subcritical and supercritical range is of ware to record the vibration phenom- sensors PT 500.41
particular interest. ena. · study of the orbit in the subcritical
and supercritical range
The field balancing of elastic rotors is an-
other area which can be investigated.
The supplied pendulum ball bearings en-
sure full mobility of the shaft. The safety
bearing limits the amplitudes to harm-
less values at speeds close to reson-
ance.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
232 233
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.11 PT 500.11
Crack detection in rotating shaft kit Crack detection in rotating shaft kit
Specification
1 flange with short shaft (loaded by belt drive), 2 bolt, 3 pick-up disk, 4 clamp set, 5 driving Technical data
shaft, 6 shaft with maximum crack (flange joint with 2 load-bearing bolts), 7 shaft with small
crack (flange joint with 5 load-bearing bolts), 8 shaft with no crack (flange joint with 6 load-
bearing bolts) Flange diameter: D=90mm
6 hexagon flange bolts M8x20
Shafts
2E • diameter: D=20mm
• short shaft: L=85mm
• long shaft: L=200mm
• max. permissible bending torques
· short shaft for belt pulley: 15,9Nm
Description Learning objectives/experiments · long shaft for mass disk: 3,9Nm
• vibration behaviour of shaft with The accessory setup includes two shafts • change in characteristic vibration be- LxWxH: 600x400x120mm (storage system)
radial crack of different lengths: one short and one haviour (natural frequency, resonance Weight: approx. 3kg
• identification of damage long. The short shaft simulates a pro- speed, amplitude and phase of vibra-
truding shaft end, and is loaded with the tions) due to a crack
Scope of delivery
Cracks due to material fatigue are very PT 500.14 belt drive. The long shaft is • crack identification from the change in
dangerous for rotating machines. Early used in conjunction with a safety bearing vibration spectrum
1 pick-up disk
detection of any crack is therefore es- from PT 500.10 and an inertia disk • detection of cracks in rotating shafts
from the base unit to investigate the ef- at the protruding shaft end The illustration shows PT 500.11 together with PT 500, PT 500.01, PT 500.14 and 1 long shaft
sential before permanent rupture and PT 500.04. 1 short shaft
often fatal consequences can occur. The fects of a crack in a shaft on the elastic • understanding and interpreting fre-
rotor. quency spectra 1 centering arbor for alignment of shafts in ex-
crack influences the vibration behaviour
• use of a computerised vibration analys- perimental setup
of the shaft by changing its rigidity. Us-
ing suitable analysis software, this The accessory setup is mounted on the er 6 bolts
change can be registered and inspec- base plate of the machinery diagnostic • in conjunction with a safety bearing 1 clamp set
tion of the machine organised in good base system PT 500. (e.g. from PT 500.10 – elastic shaft 1 storage system with foam inlay
time. accessory setup) 1 manual
To measure and evaluate the experi- · detection of cracks in rotating shafts
ment, the computerised vibration analys- (the elastic rotor) Order number 052.50011
In the experiment, the crack is simulated
by an asymmetric flange joint. Variable er PT 500.04 is required. It includes all
tightening of the flange bolts produces a the necessary sensors, a measuring
temporary gaping of the butt joint, which amplifier and analysis software to re-
closely approximates to the behaviour of cord the vibration phenomena.
a crack.
Tracking analysis of a rotor with crack: significant rise in amplitude in 2 nd order (marked
red)
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
234 235
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.12 PT 500.12
Roller bearing faults kit Roller bearing faults kit
• vibrational spectrum of the running [1] investigation of the vibrations of roller bearings
noise of roller bearings [2] roller bearing with damage to outer race
• familiarisation with the envelope ana- [3] roller bearing with damage to inner race
lysis [4] roller bearing with damage to a roller body
• influence of damage to outer race, in- [5] roller bearing with combined damage
ner race or roller body, on the spec- [6] long-running roller bearing
trum [7] new and undamaged roller bearing
• estimating service lives of roller bear- [8] radial loading of bearings with PT 500.14 (belt
ings drive)
• influence of the lubricant on the vibra- [9] accessory set for PT 500 machinery diagnostic
tion spectrum training system
• detection of faulty roller bearings [10] stackable storage system to house the compon-
• understanding and interpreting fre- ents
quency spectra
• use of a computerised vibration analys- A) undamaged bearing, B) bearing with damage to outer race, C) bearing with damage to in- Technical data
er ner race, D) bearing with damage to a roller body, E) bearing with damage to roller body,
outer and inner race, F) heavily worn bearing
Pendulum ball bearing of type NU204-E-TVP2
• inside diameter: d=20mm
• outside diameter: D=47mm
• width: 14mm
• number of rollers: 12
Scope of delivery
6 roller bearings
1 bearing block
2 circlips
2E 1 circlip pliers
1 storage system with foam inlay
The illustration shows PT 500.12 together with PT 500, PT 500.01, PT 500.14 and 1 manual
PT 500.04.
Order number 052.50012
Description
• assessment of bearing condition This accessory setup contains six roller To measure and evaluate the experi-
by vibration analysis bearings on which different faults can be ment, the computerised vibration analys-
• comparison of bearings with dif- detected and explained. The radial load er PT 500.04 is required. It includes all
ferent faults on the bearing can be set within broad the necessary sensors, a measuring
limits using the belt drive accessory set amplifier and analysis software to re-
Vibration analysis is a key tool in estimat- PT 500.14 (setting of belt tension; fixed cord the vibration phenomena.
ing the condition of a roller bearing. The load).
slow change in the vibration spectrum
provides indications of the remaining life The accessory setup is mounted on the
of a bearing and can be used as a cri- base plate of the machinery diagnosis
terion for its replacement. The spectral base system PT 500.
distribution can deliver accurate inform-
ation on the type and location of the
damage.
Envelope analysis of the bearing with damage on outer ring (B) at
f=1800min-1, damage frequency f1=3,58f, harmonic waves f2 to f7
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
236 237
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.13 PT 500.13
Couplings kit Couplings kit
Specification
Technical data
Pin coupling
• 1x centric pin
• 1x eccentric pin
· eccentricity of pin: 1mm
• max. pitch fault: 180° ±1,909°
The illustration shows PT 500.13 together with the claw coupling of PT 500.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
238 239
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.14 PT 500.14
Belt drive kit Belt drive kit
Specification
Technical data
V-belt pulleys
• large: D=125mm
• small: D=63mm
• small, eccentric: D=63mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
240 241
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.15 PT 500.15
Damage to gears kit Damage to gears kit
Specification
1 shaft end, 2 bearing cover with shaft gland, 3 bearing cover with centre distance adjust- Technical data
ment facility, 4 tapped hole for vibration sensor, 5 transparent gear unit cover; a helical
gear set, b spur toothed gear set, 4 damaged gear sets; F fault
Transmission ratio i: 1:3
Centre distance adjustable
Reference profile to DIN 867
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
242 243
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.16 PT 500.16
Crank mechanism kit Crank mechanism kit
Specification
1 connecting rod, 2 crosshead, 3 adjustment of bearing clearance, 4 pressure spring, Technical data
5 bearing block with journal bearing, 6 piston rod, 7 crank disk, 8 articulated head, 9 bal-
ance mass
Stroke: 50 – 75 – 100mm
Pressure spring
• relaxed length: 170mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments • spring stiffness: R=0,55N/mm
• vibrations of crank drives The transmission of alternating torque • experimental modal analysis of mech-
LxWxH: 600x400x170mm (storage system)
• bearing clearance or slack in os- in toothed gearing mechanisms can be anical systems
Weight: approx. 8kg
cillating machine components investigated together with accessory set • familiarisation with the envelope ana-
PT 500.15 (for investigating damage to lysis
gears). • influence of bearing clearance and Scope of delivery
Crank drives are frequently used in com-
pressors and pumps. They cause vibra- shock impact
The accessory set is mounted on the • inconsistent torque characteristic The illustration shows PT 500.16 together with PT 500, PT 500.01 and PT 500.04. 1 crank drive
tion due to the oscillating masses and 2 springs
forces. Under the alternating stress in base plate of the machinery diagnostic • wear measurement on piston rods
base system PT 500. • understanding and interpreting fre- 2 balance masses
the drive mechanism, bearing clearance,
for example, can generate shock im- quency spectra 1 set of tools
pacts with high-frequency exciter spec- To measure and evaluate the experi- • use of a computerised vibration analys- 1 storage system with foam inlay
tra. In addition, free mass forces gener- ment, the computerised vibration analys- er 1 manual
ate harmonic vibrations due to their non- er PT 500.04 is required. It includes all • in conjunction with PT 500.15
the necessary sensors, a measuring · transmission of alternating torque in Order number 052.50016
linear kinematics.
amplifier and analysis software to re- toothed gearing mechanisms
The PT 500.16 accessory set enables cord the vibration phenomena. • in conjunction with PT 500.14 or
the stroke, mass balance and bearing PT500.15
clearance on the crosshead to be adjus- · influence of gas forces on the vibra-
ted. The speed is adjusted using the tion spectrum
base unit PT 500. Gas forces such as
occur in compressors or combustion
engines can be simulated using springs.
Experiments with gas forces require
higher torques which are attained by re- Envelope analysis on crank drive with clearance at 600min-1.
ducing the speed of the drive motor Dominant is the 2 nd order 2n with harmonic waves 4n, 6n, 8n etc.
from the base unit PT 500. This reduc-
tion is achieved either with the
PT 500.14 belt drive or the PT 500.15
gear unit.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
244 245
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.17 PT 500.17
Cavitation in pumps kit Cavitation in pumps kit
Specification
1 pump housing vent screw, 2 pump housing, 3 manometer, 4 valve, 5 intake side hose, Technical data
6 housing cover, 7 thumb screw to open the housing cover
Centrifugal pump
• max. flow rate at 3300min-1: 17L/min
• max. head at 3300min-1: 12m
• impeller with 3 blades
• min. speed for cavitation: approx. 2240min-1 (with re-
striction on intake side)
Tank
• material: HDPE
Description Learning objectives/experiments • capacity: 20L
• observation and measurement of The pump can be driven directly through • observing and understanding cavitation Manometer
cavitation a flexible coupling on the base system in a centrifugal pump • delivery side: 0…4bar
• understanding conditions for PT 500 or by the PT 500.14 belt drive. · visually • intake side: -1…1,5bar
cavitation · stroboscopically (stroboscope avail-
The accessory set is mounted on the able as accessory) LxWxH: 600x400x320mm (storage system)
Cavitation can play a major role in the vi- base plate of the machinery diagnostic · by vibration analysis The illustration shows PT 500.17 together with PT 500 and PT 500.01. Weight: approx. 16kg
bration of pumps during operation. base system PT 500. • investigation of the operational vibra-
tions of a centrifugal pump
Scope of delivery
With the PT 500.17 accessory set, To measure and evaluate the experi- • understanding and interpreting fre-
ment, the computerised vibration analys- quency spectra
cavitation can be experimentally induced 1 pump
and its influence on the vibration spec- er PT 500.04 is required. It includes all • use of a computerised vibration analys-
the necessary sensors, a measuring er
1 tank
trum investigated. 1 set of hoses
amplifier and analysis software to re-
cord the vibration phenomena. 1 storage system with rubber mat
The principal elements of the accessory 1 manual
set are a single-stage centrifugal pump
and a storage tank. The pump and tank Order number 052.50017
are interconnected by hoses. Valves and
manometers in the delivery and intake
lines allow various operating conditions
to be set. The transparent plastic pump
housing provides a view into the interior
of the pump during operation. This en-
ables the formation of cavitation bubbles
Software screenshot: frequency spectrum in cavitation
to be observed. Stroboscopic analysis is
specially recommended (stroboscope
not supplied).
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
246 247
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.18 PT 500.18
Vibrations in fans kit Vibrations in fans kit
Specification
1 guard disk, 2 adjuster screw for gap between magnet and blades, 3 permanent Technical data
magnet, 4 fan rotor with 7 blades, 5 bearing block, 6 mass disk to simulate axial
forces, 7 fan rotor with 3 blades, 8 fan rotor with 5 blades, 9 fan blade, 10 fan shaft
Sheet-steel fan rotor
• 3 blades
• 5 blades
• 7 blades
• diameter: 204mm
• max. speed: 3000min-1
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
248 249
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
4 gunt
Machine dynamics
gunt gunt
Machinery diagnosis
PT 500.19 PT 500.19
Electromechanical vibrations kit Electromechanical vibrations kit
• influence of the gap on vibration beha- [1] investigation of vibration behaviour of an electric
viour motor
• influence of electromagnetic asym- [2] asynchronous motor with adjustable gap
metry on vibration behaviour [3] asymmetric magnetic field by winding with shut-off
• influence of the load on the level of vi- facility
bration [4] variable speed via frequency converter of base unit
• influence of the gap on electromagnet- [5] speed display on display and control unit of base
ic losses and efficiency unit PT 500
• influence of speed on vibration beha- [6] power display on display and control unit of base
viour unit PT 500
• understanding and interpreting fre- [7] accessory set for PT 500 machinery diagnostic
quency spectra training system
• use of a computerised vibration analys- [8] stackable storage system to house the compon-
er ents
• in conjunction with a current measur- 1 current measuring probe tap for the 3 phases, 2 connection to the display and control
ing probe unit of PT 500, 3 bearing cover with adjustable centering and scale, to adjust gap, 4 motor
shaft, 5 adapter for acceleration sensors
Technical data
· measurement of current consump-
tion per phase Asynchronous motor with variable speed
• speed range: 100…6000min-1
• nominal power output: 370W
Scope of delivery
Description
• interaction of electromagnetic The PT 500.19 accessory set features To measure and evaluate the experi-
and mechanical elements of the an adjustable centering device to adjust ment, the computerised vibration analys-
system an asymmetrical gap. A winding that can er PT 500.04 is required. It includes all
• adjustable asymmetric gap be switched off generates an electro- the necessary sensors, a measuring
between stator and rotor magnetic asymmetry. The display and amplifier and analysis software to re-
• electromagnetic asymmetry with control unit of the PT 500 base system cord the vibration phenomena.
powers the asynchronous motor and
winding that can be switched off permits the speed to be adjusted. The
motor is subjected to load by the
Asynchronous motors are in widespread PT 500.05 brake and load unit.
use as drive mechanisms. These motors
can generate machine vibrations. If The accessory set is mounted on the
there is an asymmetric gap, the circulat- base plate of the machinery diagnostic
ing magnetic forces induce rotational base system PT500. Typical spectrum of an electric motor
and bending vibrations. The same ap- rotary frequent vibration with n, 2n because of balance error
plies to partial failure of the electrical power frequent vibration with 2fe, 4fe because of magnetic forces
windings. In this case, the asymmetrical
magnetic field also induces mechanical
vibrations.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
250 251
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
Engineering mechanics and engineering design
gunt
5
Engineering design
Engineering design
GL 300.02 GL 110
Cutaway model: mitre gear 271 Cam mechanism 281
GL 300.03 TM 123
Engineering drawing Cutaway model: spur gear 271 Spur gear unit 282
TZ 200.11 GL 200
Assembly of bending device 266 Lathe gearing mechanism 294
TZ 200.71 AT 200
Assembly of lever shears 268 Machine elements: connecting elements Determination of gear efficiency 296
Overview
Machine elements 272
MG 901
Nuts and bolts kit 274 Assembly exercises
MG 903 Overview
Screw-locking devices kit 275 Assembly exercises 298
MG 905 MT 170
Thread types kit 276 Assembly shaft with journal bearings 300
TM 320 MT 171
Screw connections testing 277 Assembly hydrodynamic journal bearing 302
TM 310 MT 152
Thread testing 278 Assembly spur gear 304
MT 110.02
Assembly spur wheel/worm gear mechanism 306
MT 172
Machine elements: bearing elements Alignment of drives, shafts and gears 308
MG 911 MT 190
Roller bearings kit 279 Assembly materials tester 310
MT 190.01
Assembly data acquisition for materials tester 312
252 253
5 gunt
Engineering design
Introduction
Engineering design
rin
gd
assembly instructions
ematic o
Engineering Engineering Descriptive • define the instructions for manufacturing and assembly
mechanics design geometry • create operating instructions and documentation
Chapter 1–3 Chapter 5
S ch
From the idea for a product to its illustration in the form of a production-oriented engineering drawing
To start with, the fundamentals of engineering design are these components do and how they work. Based on this knowl-
taught, such as descriptive geometry, engineering drawing and edge, engineering design exercises can be solved.
Idea as a sketch Single-part drawings General arrangement drawing standardisation. Then we look at machine elements such as
screws, shafts, bearings and gears. The aim is to learn what
254 255
5 gunt
Engineering design
Engineering drawing
The representation of a body and the “folding” (or changing of tial imagination. These skills are vital for creating perspective
the direction of projection) causes difficulties for many students. drawings and interpreting drawings and sketches, known as the
It requires a large capacity for abstraction and spatial imagi- ability to “read” drawings.
nation. These skills can be developed with appropriate training.
The GUNT geometric models have been designed to teach spa-
standards, identified by the name DIN, ISO or EN ISO, include, for example: 10.5
° 15
and sections 30
r (v')
nach nach ISO 13DZ nach ISO 13715
• surface characteristics
Titel, Zusätzlicher Titel
TZ100.10.01.003
Modell 3
Änd. Ausgabedatum Spr. Blatt
2010-04-13 de 1/1
256 257
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Engineering drawing
TZ 100 TZ 100
Engineering drawing: three-dimensional display Engineering drawing: three-dimensional display
Specification
Technical data
5 prismatic models
Room corner made of three Plexiglas planes with inlaid drawing and a prismatic model • LxWxH: 40x30x50mm
4 cylindrical models
• WxH: 40x50mm
1 transparent model
• LxWxH: 40x30x50mm
3 Plexiglas planes
• LxWxH: 100x100x100mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments LxWxH: 335x240x71mm (storage system)
Weight: approx. 3kg
• GUNT course: engineering draw- A corner of a room, comprising three • familiarisation with three-dimensional
ing flat Plexiglas sheets, holds the models. display as a basic principle of engineer-
The corresponding view is inserted into ing drawing Scope of delivery
• model set for developing spatial
concepts each plane of the room corner, so that it • step-by-step development of spatial
is possible to directly compare model thinking: from the concrete situation to 1 storage system with foam inlay
• fundamentals of three-dimension- Prismatic models
1 set with 10 geometric models
(workpiece) and drawing. the abstract representation in an en-
al display 3 Plexiglas planes for constructing a room corner
gineering drawing
A total of ten models of varying difficulty • measuring exercises 1 rod for holding the models
In order to describe a spatial body ad- are included. One model is made of 1 paper punch
equately and thereby fulfil a basic prin- Plexiglas in order to develop an under- 1 set of instructional material, complete set of
ciple of exact replication and repeatable standing of hidden edges. The other
production, several views of the body are
drawings included
models are made of aluminium.
usually necessary. To do this, bodies are Order number 050.10000
shown in three planes: front view, side The models are precision-manufactured
view and plan or bottom view. The so that measuring exercises can also be
presentation follows fixed rules that are conducted. All parts are clearly laid out
defined in the standards. Even for simple and well protected in a storage system.
bodies, the presentation in three planes
requires a considerable degree of ab- The exercises are ideally performed by
straction ability and spatial imagination the students themselves. Two students
on the part of students. This ability is a can comfortably work with one model
prerequisite for both creating and inter- set.
preting engineering drawings or
Cylindrical models
sketches and is taught by means of geo- The instructional materials include a
metric models. complete set of drawings. A representa-
tion in three views, the 3D view and the
The TZ 100 model set provides a learn- production drawing are included for
ing concept with which to introduce stu- each model.
dents to the discipline of descriptive geo-
metry.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
258 259
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Engineering drawing
TZ 200.61 TZ 200.61
Engineering drawing: rotationally symmetrical components Engineering drawing: rotationally symmetrical components
Specification
Technical data
Sectional view of the drilling jig with the workpiece to be drilled (bearing cap)
Scope of delivery
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
260 261
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Engineering drawing
TZ 200.02 TZ 200.08
Engineering drawing: casting Engineering drawing: safety catch
Machined (left) and raw casting (right) LxWxH: 100x100x125mm (per model) 1 safety catch
Weight: approx. 3kg 1 set of instructional material
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
262 263
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Engineering drawing
TZ 300 TZ 300
Assembly of lever press Assembly of lever press
Specification
Technical data
Scope of delivery
• GUNT course: engineering draw- The assembly kit includes all single parts • introduction to engineering drawing
ing required to assemble a functional lever · read and understand engineering
• lever press as assembly kit press. The parts are clearly displayed on drawings
• exercise for interdisciplinary a base plate. All single parts and the cor- ·three-dimensional display
teaching responding drawings are available in a ·sectional views
standards-compliant and practical form. ·drawing types Exploded drawing of the lever press
·3D representation
A drawing is the most important means
The manufactured parts are precision- ·lists of parts
of information and communication in en-
manufactured from original materials ·dimensioning
gineering. The ability to read and under-
and with common tolerances and sur- ·surface and tolerance specifications
stand drawings, graphics and schemat-
faces. The surfaces of the manufactured ·difference between standard and
ics is a fundamental element in the de-
parts are burnished to prevent corro- production parts
velopment of professional competence
sion. All parts are clearly laid out and · materials specifications
in all engineering disciplines. Linking en-
well protected in a storage system. Mul- • planning and execution of simple as-
gineering communication to the associ-
tiple storage systems can be stacked on sembly operations
ated technical operations such as as-
top of each other, allowing space-saving · plan and describe operations
sembly structure, work plans and manu-
storage. · evaluate results
facturing is just as important.
• measuring exercises
Usage in the classroom should ideally be · longitudinal measurements
The TZ 300 assembly kit is an interdis-
as a practical exercise, in which two or · angular measurements
ciplinary and practical project. In addition
three students can work comfortably on • manufacturing processes
to the primary learning area of “engin-
one assembly kit. · working examples of handmade pro-
eering drawing”, it is also possible to
duction and production on machine
deal with the topics of machine ele-
tools Functional groups of the lever press: fork, pressure pin, main body
ments, assembly processes and in par-
ticular production engineering.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
264 265
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Engineering drawing
TZ 200.11 TZ 200.11
Assembly of bending device Assembly of bending device
Specification
Technical data
3D representation of the assembled bending device
LxWxH: 540x350x75mm (storage system)
Weight: approx. 6kg
Scope of delivery
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
266 267
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Engineering drawing
TZ 200.71 TZ 200.71
Assembly of lever shears Assembly of lever shears
Specification
Technical data
Scope of delivery
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
268 269
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
Cutaway models
Order Order
number number
030.30002 030.30003
GL 300.04 GL 300.05
Cutaway model: Cutaway model:
two-stage planetary
spur gear gear
Order Order
number number
030.30004 030.30005
GL 300.06 GL 300.07
Cutaway model: Cutaway model:
variable speed control gear
belt drive
Order Order
number number
030.30008 030.30012
270 271
5 gunt
Engineering design
Machine elements: connecting elements
Machine elements
Components of a technical application that fulfil certain func- Simple machine elements such as screws, cylinder pins, This section presents the following machine elements:
tions in structures are known as machine elements. Machine feather keys or seals are defined according to standards and • various connecting elements
elements can be both single components and assemblies: therefore can be exchanged without difficulty. More complex • roller bearings
machine elements such as bearings, couplings, gears or shafts • various types of gears
• individual parts such as screws, bolts or gears
are standardised in only certain important properties, such as
• assemblies consisting of individual machine elements, such main dimensions or flanges, and as such are not fully inter-
as couplings, ball bearings, transmissions or valves changeable.
Connecting elements
An individual machine element always performs the same func- Connecting elements are used when the components in the machine are intended to
tion, even though it is used in very different structures. be fixed firmly to each other. Fixing screws, rivets and studs are discrete elements that
are usually detachable and can be reused.
Screws are the most commonly used machine elements and are classified according to
Classification of machine elements their function: fastening screws connect two or more parts firmly to each other and
can be detached. Motion screws convert rotary motion into linear motion and are used
Some machine elements can perform different tasks. For example, couplings can be used as linking and /or transmission elements under load following assembly.
and shafts can be used for bearing and /or transmission.
Motion seals Complex machine elements used to alter the motion variables means of a traction gear. Here, a distinction is made between
• lip seals of path, velocity and acceleration are known as conversion ele- non-positive traction drives (belt drive) and positive traction
• radial shaft seals ments or gears. In a gear drive, positively locking gears trans- drives (chain or toothed belt drive).
• labyrinth seals fer the rotary motion from one shaft to another. In a traction
drive, the rotary motion is transferred between two shafts by
272 273
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: connecting elements
MG 901 MG 903
Nuts and bolts kit Screw-locking devices kit
• familiarisation with the most important • familiarisation with thread locks and
screws and nuts used in mechanical their specific applications
engineering and their specific applica- • familiarisation with relevant standard-
tions ised designations and terms including
• familiarisation with relevant standard- the graphical representation
ised designations and terms including
their graphical representations Specification
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
274 275
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: connecting elements
MG 905 TM 320
Thread types kit Screw connections testing
• familiarisation with the most important • axial tension force in a bolt joint de-
thread types used in mechanical engin- pendent on the tightening torque or
eering and their specific applications the elastic deformation of a slotted
• use the thread gauge to determine the block
thread type • measurement of the breakaway
torque, including for different fitting
Specification situations of the bolt joint
• measurement of thread friction and
[1] kit of thread types overall friction
[2] 8 thread types, arranged clearly
[3] cut-out sections make thread flanks Specification
visible
[4] galvanised parts [1] experiment on the correlation
[5] thread gauge for determining thread between the tension force and tight-
type ening torque of bolts
[6] all parts arranged clearly in the stor- [2] bolt size M8x100, wrench jaw size
age system 13mm
[7] multiple storage systems can be [3] elastic deformation of a slotted block
stacked on top of each other by the bolt
[4] determining the tightening and
Technical data breakaway torque with a mechanical
torque measuring device
Thread size: 24mm [5] 2 dial gauges
Thread gauge for external and internal [6] sensitive torque setting by hand
thread wheel
• metric ISO thread
• Whitworth thread Technical data
• Whitworth pipe thread
Tension force
• max. 40kN
LxWxH: 500x350x110mm (storage sys-
tem)
Weight: approx. 3kg Force/travel constant
• 20kN/mm (on slotted block)
Scope of delivery
Max. tightening torque
Description Description
1 complete kit, arranged in storage • 40Nm
• extensive teaching kit of the most This kit is used for demonstration and in- system • correlation between tightening The bolt joint is tightened and slackened
formation. It is not designed for perform- 1 set of instructional material using a special torque wrench, which Torque/travel constant
important thread types used in torque and tension force on
ing exercises or experiments. Different can be set sensitively with the aid of a • 10Nm/mm (on torque measuring
mechanical engineering Order number 053.90500
standardised bolts
bolt and nut threads are shown. The threaded spindle. By using an axial bear- device)
• standardised designations, terms • breakaway torque of a bolt joint
and specific applications thread flanks are made visible by cut-out ing, the head friction of the bolt can be
sections. A thread gauge allows you to largely excluded, so that only the friction Dial gauge
The main element of the unit is a slotted, • 0…10mm
determine the thread type and size. elastically deformable steel block. By of the threaded joint is measured.
Threads are the basis for detachable • graduation: 0,01mm
connections, such as screws with ex- tightening the bolt joint, the slotted area
The kit is arranged clearly in a storage is deformed, thereby generating an axial
ternal threads and nuts with internal
system. tension force in the bolt. The resulting LxWxH: 450x400x260mm
threads. A number of thread types have
been developed over time, depending on deformation is recorded by a mechanic- Weight: approx. 27kg
the application and loads that a thread al dial gauge, and is directly related to
has to withstand. Standards guarantee the bolt tension force generated. Scope of delivery
the function of paired components with
internal and external threads. 1 bolt tester complete with switch-
able ratchet
1 set of bolts in transparent con-
tainer
1 set of instructional material
Order number 040.32000
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
276 277
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: connecting elements Machine elements: bearing elements
TM 310 MG 911
Thread testing Roller bearings kit
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
278 279
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
GL 100 GL 110
Principle of gear units Cam mechanism
Specification Specification
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
280 281
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
TM 123 TM 124
Spur gear unit Worm gear unit
• development of the main variables and • development of the main variables and
relationships in a straight-toothed spur relationships in a worm gear
gear · investigation of transmission ratio,
· velocity ratios in spur gears torque, friction and self-locking
· gear with intermediate wheel or two- · determine the efficiency
stage gear
· influence of gear ratio on friction Specification
· determine the efficiency
[1] function and design of worm gears
Specification [2] bronze worm wheel
[3] steel worm
[1] function and design of gear drives [4] 2 aluminium cable drums
[2] 4 galvanised steel gear wheels [5] worm, worm wheel and pulleys
[3] 2 anodised aluminium pulleys mounted on ball bearings
[4] ball-bearing-mounted gears and pul- [6] anodised aluminium base plate
leys
[5] anodised aluminium base plate Technical data
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
282 283
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
TM 125
Laboratory and
Cable winch
conceptual
Learning objectives/experiments
• determine
· transmission ratio
design
· unwinding rate
· angular velocity
· efficiency
• behaviour under load
Specification
LxWxH: 270x200x250mm
Weight: approx. 19kg
Scope of delivery
1 experimental unit
2 cable drums
1 set of weights
1 set of instructional material
Order number 040.12500
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
284 285
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
TM 220 TM 220
Belt drive and belt friction Belt drive and belt friction
Technical data
Flat belts
• 1x leather/polyamide, 15x2,2mm, Extremultus LT10
1 support column, 2 pulley, 3 crank handle, 4 spring balance, 5 belt tension adjustment, • 1x polyamide, 15x0,6mm, Extremultus TT2
6 pivoting belt holder
V-belt
• ISO 4184
• profile: SPZ
• 9,7x8,0mm, rubber/fabric
Cable
• hemp, D=3mm
Pulley
• D=300mm
• material: grey iron
LxWxH: 700x350x1100mm
Weight: approx. 47kg
Gradual adjustment of the wrap angle from 30° to 180°.
Diagram shows the force ratio F1 / F2 as a function of the wrap angle α.
Scope of delivery
Description 1 experimental unit
2 flat belts
• function of a belt drive Cable friction arises due to tangential Two spring balances detect the tensile
static-friction forces at the points where forces on the respective belt ends. This
1 cable
• friction of different belt types on
the cable is in contact with the wheel or makes it possible to precisely adjust the 1 V-belt
a metal pulley
the pulley. Eytelwein’s cable friction for- belt tension using a threaded spindle. 2 dynamometers
mula is used to calculate both cable and 1 set of instructional material
The belt drives are machine elements
that are classed as traction mechan- belt friction. Two flat belts made of different materi-
Order number 040.22000
isms in the field of transmission or con- als, a V-belt and a cable belong to the
version elements. They transfer torque The TM 220 experimental unit allows scope of delivery. The experiments com-
and speed between guiding members the study by experiment of belt drives pare different belt types and materials
such as wheels or pulleys. The motion is and belt friction. At the core of the ex- and investigate the effect of the wrap
transferred by traction mechanisms perimental unit is a cast iron pulley, angle.
that can only absorb tensile forces. whose circumference features grooves
Toothed belts and chains deliver positive for V-belts and flat belts. The pulley is In addition, for V-belts, it is possible to
transmission of movements. Traction mounted on ball bearings and is study how the groove shape affects the Comparison of different belt types: 1 flat belt, 2 cable, 3 V-belt, 4 adverse belt seat in the
mechanisms such as cables, flat belts powered by a crank handle. Its flywheel coefficient of friction. groove, 5 optimum belt seat in the groove
and V-belts, on the contrary, allow for mass favours an even rotation of the pul-
non-positive transmission. ley. The belts rub on the pulley at a wrap
angle between 30° and 180°. The wrap
In non-positive belt drives, the circumfer- angle can be adjusted in increments
ential force between the belt and the of 15°.
pulley is transmitted according to the
principle of cable friction.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
286 287
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
GL 410 GL 410
Assembly simple drives Assembly simple drives
Specification
Technical data
1 worm gear, 2 spur gear, 3 bevel gear, 4 square steel tube frame Toothed belt disk
• number of teeth z=30, 60
Chain wheels
• number of teeth z=20, 30
• DIN 8192 ISO 10B-1
Spur wheel
• number of teeth z=30, 60
• module m=2mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
288 289
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
GL 420 GL 420
Assembly combined drives Assembly combined drives
Specification
Technical data
1 two-stage spur gear, 2 combined spur-bevel gear, 3 square steel tube frame
Toothed belt disk
• number of teeth z=30, 32, 48, 60
Chain wheels
• number of teeth z=20, 30
• DIN 8192 ISO 10B-1
Gear wheels
• number of teeth z=30, 36, 50, 60
• module m=2mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Pair of bevel gears
• flexible and robust assembly kit Individual activities such as understand- • familiarisation with main components • number of teeth z=30
for continuing mechanical gear ing the task and reading the drawing, as- and forms of mechanical gear engin- • module m=3mm
engineering sembling the components, adjusting, cal- eering • transmission ratio i=1
• uses industrial components to ibrating and checking the gear, and per- · two-stage belt drive • angle of rotation 90°
represent the real world accur- forming calculations are performed one · chain gear with tensioning wheel and Bevel gear: drive and driven shaft at 90 degrees to each other. The outer form of the gear
after the other. The unit is driven by a spur gear ratio wheels (envelope) is equivalent to cones. The central axes intersect.
ately LxWxH: 1000x500x500mm (assembled frame)
hand crank. A solid frame made of · two-stage spur gear
• quick and simple assembly Weight: approx. 72kg
square steel tubes and various bearings · combined bevel and spur gears
LxWxH: 600x400x120mm (storage system)
ensures sufficient accuracy to be able to · combined worm and bevel gears
Different types of gear can be combined LxWxH: 600x400x170mm (storage system)
set precise tooth interlocking. All com- · rack-and-pinion drive with spur gear
to achieve significantly altered transmis- ponents of the exercise system are • calculations on mechanical gears
sion functions and new properties. The ready at hand and securely housed in a • practical setup of different gears, asso- Scope of delivery
combination or interconnection can be storage system. ciated with setup and configuration ex-
done in series or in parallel. For ex- ercises 1 frame
ample, several gear stages are often GUNT offers three assembly kits in this • read and understand engineering 1 set of bearings
connected in series in order to achieve product range: from simple gears drawings, familiarisation with technical 1 set of gear components
larger transmission ratios. (GL 410) to combined gears (GL 420) terms 1 set of tools
and control gears (GL 430). Each as- 1 set of instructional material
The GL 420 unit offers extensive exer- sembly kit can be used completely inde-
cises on the fundamentals of gear engin- pendently of the other parts in the Order number 030.42000
eering. The unit focuses in particular on range.
the practical assembly of gear compon-
ents.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
290 291
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
GL 430 GL 430
Assembly step and shift gears Assembly step and shift gears
Specification
Technical data
1 spur gear, 2 worm gear, 3 change gear, 4 Norton gear, 5 square steel tube frame Spur gears
• number of teeth z=24, 30, 36, 40, 45, 50, 60, 76,
80, 95
• module m=2mm
Worm gear
• worm: number of teeth z=6
• worm wheel
· number of teeth z=62
· module m=3,15mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
292 293
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
GL 200
Lathe gearing mechanism
Learning objectives/experiments
First-rate
handbooks
• investigation of all essential gear func-
tions of a lathe
• main gear
• change gear
• tumbler gear
• feed gear (Norton gear)
• safe and clear demonstration of The tool slide in this experimental unit
the gear functions on a lathe performs only longitudinal motion. The
automatic longitudinal feed is achieved
The GL 200 lathe gear has all the es- by a lead screw. A removable recorder
sential features and characteristics of a drum simulates the workpiece, while the
workshop lathe: a shiftable main gear, a cutting tool is replaced by a stylus.
feed gear for driving the lead screw
(Norton gear), a change gear and a re- Since the gear parts are exposed, all
verse gear. functions can be observed clearly. All ex-
periments are easily repeatable and of-
Drive is supplied by a hand crank with fer numerous variations.
graduated dial. As such, the processes
run slowly and completely safely.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
294 295
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/1 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Machine elements: transmission elements
AT 200 AT 200
Determination of gear efficiency Determination of gear efficiency
Specification
Technical data
1 spring balance, 2 motor, 3 worm gear, 4 display and control unit, 5 spur gear, 6 brake, Three-phase AC motor with variable speed
7 brake lever arm, 8 coupling
• power output: 0,25kW
• speed: 0…3000min-1
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
296 297
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
Assembly exercises
Assembly exercises
Learning objectives
Develop broad knowledge of assembly technology as a basis for the
design of assemblies
Introduction to technical terms and technical language
Familiarisation with machine elements and standard parts
Joining (DIN 8593) Handling (VDI 2860) Special operations
Recognise assemblies, understand functions, describe systems
• joining together • retaining • cleaning Read and understand technical documentation
• filling • changing quantities • aligning
··dividing Plan and execute assembly steps and sequences
• pressing on and impressing • marking
··merging Familiarisation with typical tools and devices
• joining by moulding • lubricating
• moving
• joining by forming • ... Check and evaluate work results
··turning
• welding ··positioning
• soldering • securing
• bonding ··holding The typical scope of delivery of our assembly exercises is shown
··detaching using the example of the MT 152 spur gear:
• textile joining
• inspecting
··checking
An optimum design based on assembly requirements is char- of the workpiece. In design based on assembly requirements,
acterised by the fact that only a few simple, unique or essential the prerequisites and constraints have to be taken into account
steps are required to assemble a product. Similarly, a parallel when building the product in assembly. Design based on assem-
assembly of components should be planned at the design stage. bly cannot be learned by theoretical teaching, but must be
If fully automated assembly is planned, this requires sophisti- practised.
cated solutions especially for the automated, safe grasping
Spur gear deconstructed into individual Engineering drawing Assembly plan
parts, delivered in a solid metal case
298 299
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Assembly exercises
MT 170 MT 170
Assembly shaft with journal bearings Assembly shaft with journal bearings
Specification
Technical data
1 steel shaft, 2 pedestal bearing, 3 spacer, 4 base plate, 5 bolt to fix MT 170 into MT 172
Shaft
• D=25mm
• shaft journal for coupling: D=16mm
Materials
• pedestal bearing, bearing cap: grey cast iron
• bearing shells: red bronze to DIN 8221
The illustration shows the tool box with the assembly kit and, in the foreground, the fully assembled journal bearing
• shaft: hardened and ground steel
• Stauffer lubricator: steel
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
300 301
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Assembly exercises
MT 171 MT 171
Assembly hydrodynamic journal bearing Assembly hydrodynamic journal bearing
Specification
Bearing bore
• D=80mm
Drive shaft
• nominal diameter: D=80mm
The illustration shows the tool box with assembly kit and parts compartment insert. A fully assembled journal bearing is shown in the foreground. Materials
• bearing housing: grey cast iron
• bearing shells: steel supports, coated with white metal
Description Learning objectives/experiments • seal: ultra-heat-resistant, fibre-reinforced plastic
• shaft: stainless steel
• practical assembly kit of a hydro- The MT 171 assembly kit is part of the • function and design of a hydrodynamic
dynamic journal bearing GUNT-Practice Line for assembly, main- journal bearing LxWxH: 690x360x312mm (tool box)
• part of the GUNT-Practice Line tenance and repair, which has been de- • principles of lubrication and sealing ele- Weight: approx. 60kg
for assembly, maintenance and signed for technical colleges and com- ments
repair pany training centres. The close link • assembly and disassembly, including Operation of a hydrodynamic journal bearing: 1 to 4 build-up of a load-bearing oil film at in- Scope of delivery
between theory and practice-based for the purposes of maintenance and creasing speed
learning content is evident. MT 171 en- repair
Journal bearings generally execute a 1 complete assembly kit of a hydrodynamic journ-
ables a hydrodynamic journal bearing to • read and understand engineering
sliding motion between a bearing journal
be assembled and disassembled. Stu- drawings and operating instructions
al bearing
and a bearing shell. This sliding motion is 1 drive shaft
dents become familiar with all the com-
usually lubricated by an intermediate 1 set of tools
ponents and how they work.
medium. Hydrodynamic journal bearings 1 sealing compound, non-hardening
give wear-free continuous duty for large 1 set of instructional material
The individual parts are laid out clearly
diameters at high speeds, and are suit-
and are well protected in a tool box. The
able for high and shock-type loading. Order number 051.17100
accompanying material details the indi-
They are usually constructed as split
vidual steps involved in assembly, and
bearings. Frictional heat occurring dur-
provides additional information on the
ing operation must be dissipated by the
areas of application, mode of operation
lubricant.
and design of the journal bearing.
MT 171 is a horizontally split hydro-
dynamic pedestal journal bearing. The
bearing shells are supported by a spher-
ical face in the bearing housing so as to
ensure uniform transfer of any forces
that arise on the bottom part of the
housing. The journal bearing is lubric-
ated by a loose lubricating ring. Stand-
ard commercially available mineral oils
can be used. An auxiliary shaft is sup-
plied together with the bearing as an aid
to assembly and functional testing.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
302 303
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Assembly exercises
MT 152 MT 152
Assembly spur gear Assembly spur gear
• function and design of a helical spur [1] assembly kit of a spur gear unit
gear unit [2] part of the GUNT-Practice Line for assembly, main-
• planning and presentation of the as- tenance and repair
sembly process [3] disassembled spur gear with set of small parts and
• assembly and disassembly, including 4 assembly jigs, housed in a sturdy case with foam
for the purposes of maintenance and insert
repair [4] helical spur gear wheels
• read and understand engineering [5] gear unit comprising input housing, pedestal hous-
drawings ing, input and output shafts, input gear and output
• dimensioning exercises, gauging of pinion, as well as bearings
parts
• familiarisation with various machine Technical data
elements: ball bearings, shaft seals
• familiarisation with assembly aids and Gear dimensions without shaft connections
jigs The illustration shows the assembled spur gear unit • LxWxH: 160x135x175mm
• material selection criteria
Transmission ratio
• pinion: number of teeth: z=24, real pitch module:
m=1mm
• gear wheel: number of teeth: z=68, real pitch module:
m=1mm
• transmission ratio: i=2,83
Materials
• housing: cast iron
• shafts: tempered steel
• spur wheels: alloyed case-hardened steel
Shaft connections
1 pinion, 2 shaft seal, 3 driven shaft, 4 gear wheel, 5 drive shaft, 6 ball bearings, 7 housing • drive: DxL: 16x40mm
parts • driven: DxL: 20x40mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
304 305
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Assembly exercises
MT 110.02 MT 110.02
Assembly spur wheel / worm gear mechanism Assembly spur wheel / worm gear mechanism
Specification
Technical data
The illustration shows the assembled combined gear unit Gear dimensions without shaft connections
• LxWxH: 282x138x188mm, approx. 22kg
Transmission ratios
• spur gear stage: i=2,83
• worm gear stage: i=12,33
• total gear ratio: i=34,89
The illustration shows the tool box with the assembly kit and, in the foreground, the compartment insert for tools and small parts Spur gear stage
• pinion: number of teeth: z=24, real pitch module:
m=1mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments • gear wheel: z=68, m=1mm
• practical assembly kit of an indus- The contemporary instructional materi- • function and design of a combined Worm gear stage
trial gear unit, with simple tools als provide extensive and in-depth tech- gear unit • worm: z=3
and devices nical information that provides the basis • read and understand engineering • worm wheel: z=37, m=2,578mm
• broad scope of learning with in- for lesson design. The core element of drawings
terdisciplinary problems the teaching materials is a complete set • components and assemblies, their Drive principle of the two-stage helical worm gear Max. output torque: 212Nm
• part of the GUNT-Practice Line of drawings with lists of parts, individual design features and functions
part designations, exploded views and • dimensioning exercises, gauging of
for assembly, maintenance and assembly drawings. All drawings are to parts
Materials
repair • housing: cast iron
standard and are dimensioned in ac- • work planning, especially planning and
• shafts: tempered steel
cordance with production requirements. representation of the assembly pro-
The MT 110.02 unit deals with a two- • spur wheels, worm: alloyed case-hardened steel
An extensive set of slides for overhead cess
stage gear. The assembly kit contains all projectors is another useful feature. All • familiarisation with assembly aids and
the individual parts to build the gear. The parts are laid out clearly and are well jigs Shaft connections
gear comprises a spur gear stage as its protected in a sheet-steel tool box. Small • assembly exercises: assemblies and • drive: DxL: 16x40mm
input, with a downstream worm gear parts are supplied in a box with a trans- complete unit • driven: DxL: 30x60mm
stage (combined gear). The fit seatings parent lid. • analysis of faults and damage, in con-
of the gear unit are designed to allow junction with maintenance and repair LxWxH: 700x380x320mm (tool box)
the complete assembly process to be A set of tools is included. Using the op- steps Weight: approx. 38kg
performed by hand. The project-based tional MT 172 unit, the assembled gear • criteria for selecting materials
nature of this assembly kit allows for var- can be subjected to a functional test. • in conjunction with MT 172 Scope of delivery
ied and above all interdisciplinary work in · functional test of the assembled
the classroom. The project is particu- gear unit 1 complete set of parts for the gear unit
larly recommended for a practical-based 1 set of seals
teaching organisation, in conjunction
1 set of tools
with independent student activity and
teamwork.
1 set of instructional material
Order number 051.11002
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
306 307
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Assembly exercises
MT 172 MT 172
Alignment of drives, shafts and gears Alignment of drives, shafts and gears
Specification
Drive motor
• 4-pole asynchronous motor
• max. power: 0,55kW
2E • speed: 1400min-1
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
308 309
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Assembly exercises
MT 190 MT 190
Assembly materials tester Assembly materials tester
Specification
Technical data
x
Test force: max. 20kN
Stroke: max. 45mm
Free installation space for specimens: 165x65mm
Tensile specimens: B6x30mm, DIN 50125
Description Learning objectives/experiments Hardness specimens: LxWxH 30x30x10mm
Sphere for hardness testing: diameter 10mm
• assembly set of a unit for basic The assembled MT190 experimental • read and understand technical docu-
experiments in materials testing unit represents a real, fully functional mentation
Measuring ranges
• can be expanded with electronic materials tester that can be used to • plan and execute assembly steps and
• force: 0…20kN, graduation: 0,5kN
data acquisition conduct tensile tests and Brinell hard- sequences
• travel: 0…10mm, graduation: 0,01mm
• part of the GUNT-Practice Line ness tests. The experimental unit has • familiarisation with machine elements
been developed specifically for experi- and components
for assembly, maintenance and LxWxH: 610x520x850mm (assembled)
ments in small groups and is character- • commission and inspect materials Sectional drawing of the horizontal hydraulic cylinder: 1 trapezoidal nut, 2 hand wheel axle,
repair ised by a clear design, simple operation tester after successful assembly 3 crank side flange, 4 cylindrical tube, 5 trapezoidal threaded spindle, 6 clamping bolt, 7 re- Weight: approx. 53kg
tainer, 8 piston, small, 9 pressure side flange
and accessories that are easy to ex- • plan, implement and evaluate mainten-
The MT 190 unit is supplied as an as- change. ance operations Scope of delivery
sembly kit and contains all mechanical • fault analysis: troubleshooting, fault
parts, measuring units, hydraulic com- The tensile specimens are clamped analysis and remedy 1 complete assembly kit of a materials tester
ponents with seals and pipe material between the upper cross member and • after successful assembly 1 force gauge
with all connecting parts. Assembly com- the crosshead. The hardness specimens · tensile test on metallic specimens 1 dial gauge for determining the elongation
prises the mechanical structure, the hy- are secured between the crosshead and · plot load–extension diagrams 1 set of tools and assembly aids
draulic assembly of both cylinders and lower cross member. The test force is · Brinell hardness test
the piping installation. All tools and aids 1 set of small and replacement parts (e.g. seals)
generated by means of a hand-operated 1 set of tensile specimens
required are included, as well as extens- hydraulic system and displayed on a
ive teaching materials. 1 set of hardness specimens
large force gauge with a drag indicator.
1 set of instructional material, comprising: tech-
A dial gauge measures the elongation of
The MT 190.01 assembly set allows for the specimens. nical system description, complete set of draw-
data acquisition as an extension to the ings with individual parts and parts list, descrip-
range of experiments. Using MT 190, tion of maintenance and repair operations, sug-
students can learn about working on a gested exercises
complex project. This involves the plan-
ning, implementation and checking of Order number 051.19000
Piston in detail: 1 O-ring, 2 piston sealing ring, 3 guide ring
processes related to assembly, commis-
sioning and repair.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
310 311
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
5 gunt
Engineering design
gunt gunt
Assembly exercises
MT 190.01 MT 190.01
Assembly data acquisition for materials tester Assembly data acquisition for materials tester
Specification
Technical data
Port for connecting data acquisition to the basic unit: 1 displacement sensor, 2 pressure Pressure sensor for force measurement
sensor for force measurement, 3 measuring amplifier, 4 USB cable
• 0…100bar
Displacement sensor
• 0…50mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
312 313
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
Engineering mechanics and engineering design
gunt
6
Materials testing
SE 100 TM 260.01
Frame for load testing, 400 kN 336 Rolling friction in friction wheels 356
SE 110.48 TM 260.02
Bending test, plastic deformation 338 Elasto-hydrodynamic behaviour 358
TM 260.03
Dynamic friction in pin – disk 360
TM 260.04
Impact test Frictional vibrations 362
WP 400 TM 260.05
Impact test, 25 Nm 340 Dynamic friction in cylindrical pin – roller 364
WP 410 TM 260.06
Impact test, 300 Nm 342 Pressure distribution in journal bearings 366
TM 232
Bearing friction 368
TM 282
Torsion test Friction in journal bearings 370
WP 500 TM 280
Torsion test, 30 Nm 344 Pressure distribution in journal bearings 372
WP 510 TM 290
Torsion test 200 Nm, motor drive 346 Journal bearing with hydrodynamic lubrication 374
CE 105
Corrosion of metals 376
Fatigue of materials
WP 140
Fatigue strength test 348
WP 600
Creep rupture test 350
314 315
6 gunt
Materials testing
Introduction
316 317
6 gunt
Materials testing
Introduction
Compression test to determine flow curves Various methods for determining hardness
Compression tests are less significant for testing metallic Hardness refers to the mechanical resistance with which a body opposes the intrusion of another body. .
materials compared to tensile tests. However, when study-
F
ing building materials such as natural stone, brick, concrete,
wood etc., the compression test is fundamentally import-
ant. A standardised specimen with a known cross section is Principle of the Brinell hardness test F
loaded uniformly with low increasing force in the longitudinal In this test method, a standardised test body – a hard
direction. A uniaxial stress state prevails in the specimen. metal sphere – is pressed into the workpiece under defined
The ratio of stress to compression can be shown from the conditions. The surface of the lasting impression is then
plotted force-path diagram. The stress-compression dia measured optically. The impression surface is calculated
gram shows clearly the different behaviour of the various from the impression diameter and the sphere diameter.
!(¡{
1 separate materials and provides the characteristic values A triaxial stress state develops in the specimen,
for compression strength, 0,2% offset yield point and the underneath the impressing test body.
!(¡{
1
!(¡{
2 compression yield stress.
!(¡{
2
The Brinell hardness is calculated from the test load and
!(¡{
3 impression surface of the spherical segment.
d2
Test process and optical measurement of
1
d
1 1 the permanent indentation
Test process in the compression test 0,102 · F 0,102 = =
HB = 9,81 g 1 hard metallic sphere, 2 specimen,
1 thrust plate, 2 specimen, 3 pressure plate, F test load AB to convert N F test load, d1 and d2 diameters perpendic- 90°
into kgf ular to each other
σ
!(¡{
2
Principle of the Vickers hardness test F
The test method is similar to the Brinell hardness test.
Unlike the Brinell method, a pyramid-shaped diamond
!(¡{
1 is used as the test body. The impression diagonal is
determined by measuring the two diagonals d1 and d2 and !(¡{
1
σ0,2 σy σF
d2
Test process and optical measurement of the permanent indentation
Stress-compression diagram
1 pyramid-shaped diamond, 2 specimen, F test load, d1 and d2 diagonals
d1
σ stress, ε compression, s 0,2% offset yield point,
ε σy compression yield stress, σF compression strength,
s = 0,2% 1 elastic region, 2 fracture
Principle of the Rockwell hardness test
Rockwell's hardness test method allows the hardness to be
Every material has a characteristic profile of read directly on a dial gauge as the
compression and stress. difference of the depths F0 F0+ F1 F0
σ
of penetration.
a
!(¡{
1
d
b
!(¡{
2
c
I II III
318 319
6 gunt
Materials testing
Introduction
Bending tests for the study of deformation behaviour Shear test to study the load capacity against shearing
The most frequently studied bending load in materials testing between the load of a bending beam and its elastic deformation. The shear test is applied when testing screws, rivets, pins and means of external shear forces until the specimen shears off.
is the three-point bending test. Using this method, a beam The effects of modulus of elasticity and second moment of area parallel keys in order to determine the shear strength of the The resistance of a material against the shear stress can be
mounted on two supports is studied under a single force applied are shown. material or the behaviour of the material under shear strain. determined by two different methods, the single-shear and the
to the centre. The bending test demonstrates the relationship To do this, the shear stresses are produced in the specimen by double-shear testing method.
!(¡{
3
The cupping specimen to be tested is clamped between a In the torsion test, a specimen is clamped at one end and
blank holder and die and is indented with a hardened spherical subjected to the load of a steadily increasing moment, known
stamp (cupped) until the specimen cracks. The depth achieved as the twisting moment or torsional moment. The twisting
is considered a standard of comparison for the cold formabil- moment causes shear !(¡{
1 !(¡{
2 !(¡{
3 !(¡{
4
ity. In addition, the type of crack and the surface structure of stresses in the cross-
the sagging area are analysed. section of the specimen
!(¡{
1
F and a stress state that
leads to deformation and
ultimately to fracture.
γ φ τ
!(¡{
2
!(¡{
3
Test process in the torsion test
1 rigid clamping, 2 specimen, 3 rotating clamping, 4 drive;
Test process in the cupping test !(¡{
4 Mt twisting moment, γ shearing angle, φ twisting angle,
Mt
1 stamp, 2 specimen, 3 die, 4 crack, F test load τ shear stress
Mt
320 321
6 gunt
Materials testing
Introduction
Impact test to determine the toughness property Notched-bar impact work-temperature diagram
The impact test is a method with sudden loading and is suit- the material does not depend on the material alone, but also on
able primarily for determining the cleavage fracture tendency other external conditions such as temperature or stress state.
or toughness property of a material. This test method does not
Different testing methods are used to determine the notched-
provide any values of material characteristics. The determined
bar impact strength. In the Charpy test, the test body is
values of the impact test, the notched-bar impact strength, do Metal with face-centred
mounted on two sides and a pendulum strikes the centre of the
not fit directly into calculations on strength. Rather, they help cubic lattice structure
test body at the height of the notch. In the Izod and Dynstat
only with a rough selection of materials for a specific task. Cu, Al, Ag, Pb
tests, the test body is upright and a pendulum strikes the free
The deformation behaviour is often an important criterion for end of the test body above the notch.
the selection of materials. It can be used to identify quickly which
of the selected materials are brittle or tough. The brittleness of Ak
!(¡{
c
Principle of the Charpy notched-bar impact test
bent specimen
322 323
6 gunt
Materials testing
Introduction
Materials behave differently under lasting static loads at without an increase in load lead to a slow but steady irreversible
Fatigue strength test increased temperatures than they do under the same load at plastic deformation, also known as creep. After a sufficiently
room temperature. After a certain amount of time, increased long, even load time, this leads to fracture of the specimen.
The fatigue strength defines the load limit up to which a material high number of load cycles with stresses that are far below the temperatures under stresses below the hot yield point and
that is loaded dynamically withstands without breaking. Moving yield point and far below the fracture stress.
machine parts in particular are subject to dynamic loads, caused
by vibrations for example. In this case, a fracture occurs after a Principle of the creep rupture test
In the creep rupture test, a specimen is subjected to load at a characteristic curve, which is known as the creep curve.
!(¡{
1 !(¡{
2 F !(¡{
3 constant stress and constant temperature. This experiment is The creep rupture test determines the characteristic values for
F F MB MB n performed multiple times with different stresses, but always at the creep strength and the various strain values.
the same temperature. The plastic deformations are measured
in continuous intervals. All measured values can then be
Differently loaded specimens transferred to a creep diagram. The measured elongation shows
1 specimen with tensile and compression stress, 2 specimen with stress from alternating bending,
3 specimen with stress from rotary bending; F force, MB bending moment, n speed
Creep curve
Principle of the fatigue strength test with stress on rotary bending If the elongation is plotted over time, we get the creep curve.
The Wöhler diagram contains three regions: Phase 3, the tertiary creep with again increas-
σ (log)
324 325
6 gunt
Materials testing
Introduction
WP series:
A complete course
in the fundamentals
of materials testing
326 327
6 gunt
Materials testing
Introduction
The WP 410 experimental unit generates The compact WP 600 experimental unit is used
a 300 Nm work capacity to conduct creep rupture tests
• Charpy notched-bar impact test with increased work • simple creep rupture tests with lead and plastic specimens
capacity • experiments can be conducted at room temperature
• pendulum impact tester based on industrial standards/ • cooling elements allow experiments to be conducted below room temperature
DIN EN ISO 148-1
• experiments last from a few minutes to an hour
• safe experiments thanks to two-hand release of the
hammer and optional protective cage for pendulum impact
tester WP 410.50
• preparation display and storage with the WP 410.20
system for data acquisition
328 329
6 gunt
Materials testing
Introduction
Accessories for various materials tests WP 400, 25 Nm test load WP 410, 300 Nm test load
Impact test Impact test
WP 300, 20 kN test load WP 310, 50 kN test load WP 400.01 Set of 10 ISO-V specimens 10x5, WP 410.01 Set of 10 ISO-V specimens 10x10, St 37k
construction steel (S235JRC+C) WP 410.02 Set of 10 ISO-V specimens 10x10, Cu
Tensile tests Tensile tests
WP 400.02 Set of 10 ISO-V specimens 10x5, CuZn WP 410.03 Set of 10 ISO-V specimens 10x10, CuZn
WP 300.02 Set of 4 tensile specimens, Al, Cu, St, CuZn WP 310.05 Wedge grips for round & flat tensile specimens WP 400.03 Set of 10 ISO-V specimens 10x10, CuZn
WP 410.50 Safety cage for pendulum impact tester
WP 400.04 Set of 10 ISO-U specimens 10x5,
WP 300.21 Set of 4 tensile specimens, Al WP 310.12 Set of 10 tensile specimens
free cutting steel (9SMn28)
F10x50 DIN 50125, St (S235JRC+C)
WP 300.22 Set of 4 tensile specimens, Cu
WP 400.05 Set of 10 GUNT-R7 specimens,
WP 310.06 Threaded grips for tensile specimens,
WP 300.23 Set of 4 tensile specimens, St free cutting steel (9SMn28)
threaded end
WP 300.24 Set of 4 tensile specimens, CuZn WP 400.06 Set of 10 GUNT-R5 specimens,
WP 310.11 Set of 10 tensile specimens
free cutting steel (9SMn28)
WP 300.14 Chucks for flat tensile specimens B10x50 DIN 50125 M16, St (S235JRC+C)
WP 400.07 Set of 10 GUNT-R7 specimens,
WP 300.25 Set of 4 tensile specimens, flat, WP 310.07 Holder for tensile specimens, dumbbell-shaped
heat treatable steel (C45k)
Al, Cu, St, CuZn
WP 310.13 Set of 10 tensile specimens, dumbbell-shaped,
WP 400.08 Set of 10 GUNT-R7 specimens, WP 510, 200 Nm test load
St (S235JRC+C)
construction steel (S235JRC+C)
Compression tests Compression tests WP 400.09 Set of 10 GUNT-V specimens, Torsion test
WP 300.05 Compression plates for compression tests, large WP 310.04 Compression plates for compression tests construction steel (S235JRC+C) WP 510.01 Set of 5 torsion specimens, St
WP 300.70 Set of 4 compression specimens, gypsum WP 310.15 Set of 5 compression specimens, WP 400.50 Safety cage for pendulum impact tester WP 510.02 Set of 5 torsion specimens, CuZn
WP 300.71 Set of 4 compression specimens, wood 4x plastic, 1x wood WP 510.03 Set of 5 torsion specimens, Al
WP 300.72 Set of 4 compression specimens, plastic WP 500, 30 Nm test load
Material fatigue with WP 600
Brinell hardness test Brinell hardness test Torsion test
WP 310.01 Experimental setup for Brinell hardness tests Creep rupture test
WP 500.01 Set of 6 torsion specimens, St, Al, CuZn
WP 300.03 Set of 4 hardness specimens, Al, Cu, St, CuZn WP 300.03 Set of 4 hardness specimens, Al, Cu, St, CuZn WP 600.01 Set of 10 specimens, PE
WP 300.31 Set of 4 hardness specimens, Al WP 300.31 Set of 4 hardness specimens, Al WP 600.02 Set of 10 specimens, Pb
Material fatigue with WP 140
WP 300.32 Set of 4 hardness specimens, Cu WP 300.32 Set of 4 hardness specimens, Cu
WP 300.33 Set of 4 hardness specimens, St WP 300.33 Set of 4 hardness specimens, St Fatigue strength test Accessories
WP 300.34 Set of 4 hardness specimens, CuZn WP 300.34 Set of 4 hardness specimens, CuZn
WP 300.12 Measuring magnifier for Brinell hardness test WP 300.12 Measuring magnifier for Brinell hardness test WP 140.01 Set of 3 specimens, various fillet radii, St WP 300.09 Laboratory trolley
330 331
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tensile, compression, bending and hardness testing
WP 300 WP 300
Materials testing, 20kN Materials testing, 20kN
Technical data
Measuring ranges
• force: 0…20kN, graduation: 0,5kN
• displacement: 0…20mm, graduation: 0,01mm
x LxWxH: 610x500x860mm
Weight: approx. 48kg
Stress-strain diagram for various materials: a hardened steel, b tempered steel, c annealed
steel, d alloyed aluminium Scope of delivery
Description 1 experimental unit
• compact, simple experimental Compression, bending, shear and cup- The experimental unit can also be 1 device for hardness test
unit for basic destructive tests ping tests can be conducted using the equipped with electronic force and dis- 1 force gauge
• tensile tests, Brinell hardness accessories. Plate and coil springs can placement measurement. Using the 1 elongation dial gauge
test also be tested. The experimental unit WP 300.20 system for data acquisition, 4 sets of tensile specimens
has been developed specifically for ex- the measured values for force and dis- 4 sets of hardness specimens
A solid understanding of the properties periments in small groups and is charac- placement can be transferred to a PC 1 set of instructional material
of materials is essential for technical terised by a clear design, simple opera- where they can be analysed with the
tion and accessories that are easy to ex- software. Order number 020.30000
and scientific professions. This know-
ledge helps select the suitable material, change.
monitor production and processing and
ensure the requirements in terms of a The tensile specimens are clamped
component. The materials test provides between the upper cross member and
the necessary data in a reproducible the crosshead. The hardness specimens
and precisely quantified manner. The are secured between the crosshead and
tensile test, bending test and hardness lower cross member. The test force is Brinell hardness test: 1 hardened steel ball, 2 specimen; F test load, d1 and d2 dimensions
test are all part of classic destructive generated by means of a hand-operated of the impression surface
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
332 333
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tensile, compression, bending and hardness testing
WP 310 WP 310
Materials testing, 50kN Materials testing, 50kN
• together with the accessories [1] hydraulically operated trainer for materials testing,
· tensile test based on industrial standards
· compression test [2] generation of tensile and compressive forces
· Brinell hardness test [3] adjustable test load and travel velocity
· bending test [4] generation of test load via gear pump and double-
· shear test acting hydraulic cylinder
· cupping test [5] force measurement via a strain-gauge full bridge
· spring testing with acoustic overload signal, max. overload 150%
[6] displacement measurement via linear potentiomet-
er
[7] LED displays for force and displacement with tare
and maximum-value storage
[8] GUNT software for data acquisition via USB under
Windows
1 hydraulic cylinder for generating tensile and compressive forces, 2 operating area with [9] wide range of accessories available
the accessory WP 310.05, 3 force sensor, 4 adjustable height lower cross-member with
lock, 5 displays and controls, 6 displacement sensor
Technical data
Measuring ranges
• force: 0…50kN
x • displacement: 0…150mm
• hydraulically operated trainer, The clean layout and simple operation The extensive accessories provide 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
based on industrial standards mean the experimental sequence can be tensile and compression tests, Brinell 1 phase
• direct generation of tensile and observed in all details and phases. The hardness tests, bending, shear and cup-
compressive forces power of the trainer allows tests to be ping tests. Plate and coil springs can Scope of delivery
• extensive accessories for experi- performed on an industrial scale. Mater- also be tested. The test load and elonga-
ial specification data and laws can be tion of the specimen are measured by 1 trainer
ments from destructive materials
verified using self-determined measured sensors and are displayed. 1 GUNT software CD + USB cable
testing values. 1 set of instructional material
The measured values are transmitted
A classic discipline of materials testing The vertical, hydraulically operated train- directly to a PC where they can be ana- Order number 020.31000
is the destructive testing method, in er with direct force generation can pro- lysed using the software included.
which specimens are mechanically duce both tensile and compressive
tested to failure. The materials test forces. The height of the lower cross-
provides data for hardness, rigidity and member can be adjusted for coarse ad-
strength in a reproducible and precisely justment. Cylindrical receptacles on the Software screenshot: Brinell hardness test
quantified manner. cross-members allow for easy exchange
of accessories.
The WP 310 unit, in conjunction with
the accessories, offers experiments
from destructive materials testing.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
334 335
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tensile, compression, bending and hardness testing
SE 100 SE 100
Frame for load testing, 400kN Frame for load testing, 400kN
Specification
Technical data
The illustration shows SE 100 together with various accessories
Frame
• steel profiles: U 400, St52
Description Learning objectives/experiments • frame opening WxH: 4100x1700mm
• clear span in the double frame: 635mm
• load tests on components from The design of the frame means experi- • together with the accessories
steelwork and civil engineering ments can be conducted quickly and · bending tests Test loads
• specially designed for large com- without complicated assembly. The unit · load tests • centre position: max. 300kN
ponents at a 1:1 scale offers a very wide range of possibilities · compression tests • off-centre: max. 2x 200kN
• wide range of applications thanks in conjunction with the accessories and
the load application device. LxWxH: 5000x1350x2820mm
to extensive accessories Suggestions for your own tests with various large components, for example 1 load on Weight: approx. 2600kg
The hydraulically operated load applica- frame, 2 load on beam or girder
The demands of modern, technically tion device, available as accessory
sophisticated designs require a solid un- Scope of delivery
SE 100.12, includes a double-action hy-
derstanding of the strength and deform- draulic cylinder and a hand-operated
ation of components. Different load 1 frame of steel profiles
pump mounted on a table.
states can be simulated in load experi- Order number 022.10000
ments and the reaction to the load re- The load application device is mounted
corded and analysed. This makes it pos- on rollers and can be positioned at any
sible to demonstrate the load bearing point on the upper cross-member of the
capacity of the design by means of ex- frame. Depending on the experimental
periment. The SE 100 frame for load setup, it is also possible to use two load
tests has been designed specifically for application devices (SE 100.02) and
experiments in the fields of steelwork therefore generate several forces. The
and civil engineering. Large components bending is indicated by means of dial
at a 1:1 scale are studied. gauges, available as accessory
SE 100.03.
The frame is delivered in prefabricated
parts that must be assembled on site. Large components such as reinforced
This makes it possible to transport the concrete beams, girders or steel frames
Bend test on a plane truss SE 100.04; 1 unloaded truss, 2 loaded truss, F test load,
FA and FB support forces, w bending
separate parts through normal door- can be subjected to loads and investig-
ways. The frame is set up on four ad- ated experimentally. The SE 100.04 ac-
justable and vibration-damping feet. The cessory is available for experiments on
generous operating area is designed as trusses. The forces on typical bars of
a double frame so that longer compon- the truss are recorded by means of
ents can also be studied. strain gauges.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
336 337
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tensile, compression, bending and hardness testing
SE 110.48 SE 110.48
Bending test, plastic deformation Bending test, plastic deformation
Specification
Technical data
Beams
• 1x 1000x15x3mm, steel
• 1x 1000x15x3mm, aluminium
• 1x H-profile, 1000x15x15x2mm, aluminium
1 load application device, 2 SE 112 frame, 3 beam, 4 movable support, 5 fixed support, 6
dial gauge
Load application device
• max. load: ±5000N
• max. travel: 100mm
Measuring range
x • travel: 0…50mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
338 339
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Impact test
WP 400 WP 400
Impact test, 25Nm Impact test, 25Nm
• determine the notched-bar impact [1] classic Charpy notched-bar impact test
work [2] pendulum impact tester based on
• determine the notched-bar impact DIN EN ISO 148-1
strength [3] hammer mass can be varied by adding or removing
• analyse the fracture surface charac- weights
teristics [4] brake to reduce the residual energy
• plot a notched-bar impact work–tem- [5] safe operation thanks to two-hand release of the
perature diagram hammer and protective ring for the operating area
• influence of notch shape, material and [6] protective cover WP 400.50 available as an ac-
specimen temperature on the notched- cessory
bar impact work [7] scale for displaying the notched-bar impact work
[8] notched-bar impact specimens according to ISO
(U/V notch) and GUNT specimens: aluminium, cop-
per, steel, brass
1 hammer with removable additional weights, 2 protective ring, 3 scale with drag pointer, [9] GUNT software WP 400.20 for analysing the ex-
4 notched bar impact specimen, 5 two-hand trigger and brake, 6 hammer fixing periments as optional extra
Technical data
Hammer
• weight: 2,05kg and 3,42kg (with extra weights)
• extra weights: 4x 0,342kg
• impact velocity: 3,8m/s
• head: 745mm
Principle of operation of the Charpy notched bar impact test: H height of fall, h height of Notched bar impact specimens
rise, a hammer and specimen, plan view
• LxW: 10x5mm, 10x10mm
• cross-section at the notch root: 10x8 and 10x5mm
Description
Specimen materials
• Charpy notched-bar impact test In the experiment, the hammer attached A brake reduces the residual energy of • automotive steel 9SMn28K
• classic method from destructive to a pendulum arm describes an arc. At the hammer on each swing until it • tempering steel C45k
materials testing for quality con- the lowest point of the hammer path, reaches zero. • structural steel S235JRC+C
trol and analysis of the fracture the hammer transfers part of its kinetic • brass CuZn40Pb2
behaviour of metallic materials energy to the notched specimen. The A protective ring ensures the experi-
• pendulum impact tester based on specimen is either destroyed or bent by ments can be conducted safely while LxWxH: 1000x300x1000mm
the impact and pushed between the sup- also fixing the hammer in place. The
DIN EN ISO 148-1 Weight: approx. 55kg
ports. hammer is triggered with two hands for
safer operation. A protective cover for
In the field of industrial quality control, The notched-bar impact work required
Scope of delivery
the WP 400.50 operating area is avail-
the impact test is a widely used test to deform the specimen is read directly able as an accessory.
method with which to quickly and easily 1 experimental unit
off a large scale. By using the
determine characteristics for a material WP 400.20 system for data acquisition, The experimental results allow quality 1 set of extra weights
or component analysis. the measured values can be transferred control and an analysis of the fracture 1 set of notched bar impact specimens (90 pcs.)
Notched bar impact work-temperature diagram with typical fracture surfaces: average-
to a PC where they can by analysed with behaviour of different metallic materials. value curve with distribution area, Ak notched bar impact work, T temperature; a depth posi- 1 set of instructional material
The WP 400 experimental unit is a solid- the software. Non-metallic specimens can also be tion with low-deformation fractures, b transition region (steep front) with mixed fractures,
pendulum impact tester based on c height position with ductile fractures Order number 020.40000
used. Specimens with different notch
DIN EN ISO 148-1, designed for the In order to vary the output energy, the geometries, in different materials and
Charpy notched-bar impact test. The mass of the hammer can be changed by specimen dimensions are included in the
clean layout and simple operation mean adding or removing weights. scope of delivery.
the experimental sequence can be ob-
served in all details and phases.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
340 341
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Impact test
WP 410 WP 410
Impact test, 300Nm Impact test, 300Nm
• determine the notched-bar impact [1] Charpy notched-bar impact test with increased
work work capacity
• determine the notched-bar impact [2] pendulum impact tester based on industrial stand-
strength ards / DIN EN ISO 148-1
• analyse the fracture surface charac- [3] hammer mass can be varied by adding or removing
teristics weights
• plot a notched-bar impact work–tem- [4] brake to reduce the residual energy
perature diagram [5] safe operation thanks to two-handed release of the
• influence of notch shape, material and hammer
specimen temperature on the notched- [6] protective cover for pendulum impact tester
bar impact work WP 400.50 available as an accessory
[7] scale for displaying the notched-bar impact work
[8] ISO-V notched specimens made of stainless steel,
specimens of copper, brass and steel available as
1 hammer with removable extra weights, 2 scale, 3 notched bar impact specimen, 4 drag accessories
pointer, 5 two-hand release, 6 brake [9] GUNT software WP 410.20 for analysing the ex-
periments as optional extra
Technical data
Hammer
• weight: 9,9kg and 19,8kg (with extra weights)
• extra weights: 4x 2,475kg
• impact velocity: 5,5m/s
• pendulum length: 840mm
x • angle of fall: 150°
Notched bar impact work-temperature diagram with typical fracture surfaces: average- Supports for specimens
value curve with distribution area, Ak notched bar impact work, T temperature; a depth posi- • gap: 40mm
tion with low-deformation fractures, b transition region (steep front) with mixed fractures,
c height position with ductile fractures
Description Notched bar impact specimens (ISO V and ISO U)
• LxW: 10x10mm
• Charpy notched-bar impact test The clean layout and simple operation In order to vary the output energy, the
with increased work capacity up mean the experimental sequence can be mass of the hammer can be changed by Specimen material
to 300Nm observed in all details and phases. The adding or removing weights. A brake re- • stainless steel 1.4301
• pendulum impact tester based on power of the trainer allows tests to be duces the residual energy of the ham-
industrial standards / performed on an industrial scale. mer. LxWxH: 800x600x1460mm
DIN EN ISO 148-1 Weight: approx. 360kg
In the experiment, the hammer attached A protective cover for the operating
• safe experiments thanks to two-
to a pendulum arm describes an arc. At area allows the experiments to be con-
handed release of the hammer the lowest point of the hammer path,
Required for operation
ducted safely and is available as access-
and optional protective cage the hammer transfers part of its kinetic ory WP 410.50. The hammer is
WP 410.50 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz, 1 phase
energy to the notched specimen. The triggered with two hands for safer oper-
specimen is either destroyed or bent by ation.
In the field of industrial quality control, the impact and pushed between the sup- Scope of delivery
the impact test is a widely used test ports. The experimental results allow quality
method with which to quickly and easily control and an analysis of the fracture
1 experimental unit
determine characteristics for a material The notched-bar impact work required behaviour of different metallic materials. Protective cover for pendulum impact tester WP 410.50 available as an accessory 1 set of extra weights
or component analysis. to deform the specimen is read directly Non-metallic specimens can also be 1 set of ISO-V notched bar impact specimens
off a large scale. By using the used. The scope of delivery includes made of stainless steel (10 pcs.)
The WP 410 trainer is a solid-pendulum WP 410.20 system for data acquisition, stainless steel ISO-V notched-bar impact 1 set of instructional material
impact tester based on DIN EN ISO the measured values can be transferred specimens. Specimens made of other
148-1, designed for the Charpy notched- to a PC where they can by analysed with materials are available as accessories. Order number 020.41000
bar impact test. the software.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
342 343
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Torsion test
WP 500 WP 500
Torsion test, 30Nm Torsion test, 30Nm
Specification
Technical data
x
Max. twisting moment: 30Nm
Loading device, worm gear
• transmission ratio: 1:63
• generate the twisting moment by The twisting moment is applied manually • torsion tests with different materials Specimens
means of a worm gear by means of a handwheel and a worm and load until specimen fracture • diameter: 6mm
• measure the twisting moment by gear. The base plate is torsionally rein- • determine the twisting strength • 4x 75mm, steel
means of a strain-gauge measur- forced. A transparent protective cover • plot the diagram of twisting moment • 4x 75mm, aluminium
ing shaft protects against flying fragments. over twisting angle • 4x 75mm, brass
• incremental encoder for measur- • influence of • 2x 175mm, steel
The effective twisting moment is meas- · specimen material Principle of operation of torsion test: Mt twisting moment, φ twisting angle • 2x 350mm, steel
ing the twisting angle ured by means of a moment-measuring · specimen cross-section • 2x 700mm, steel
shaft fitted with strain gauges and can · specimen length
The torsion test is a destructive testing be read directly on a display. The twist-
method that studies the plastic beha- Measuring ranges
ing angle is recorded by an incremental • twisting moment: 0…30,0Nm
viour of materials. In practice, compon- encoder and can also be read. The
ents that are twisted in their application • twisting angle: 0…±3200°, resolution: 0,1°
measured values are transmitted dir-
(e.g. screws, shafts, axles, wires and ectly to a PC where they can be ana-
springs) are studied with this test meth- lysed using the software. LxWxH: 1400x700x500mm (experimental unit)
od. LxWxH: 230x210x120mm (measuring amplifier)
Test bars of different materials and dif- Weight: approx. 43kg (total)
The WP 500 experimental unit allows ferent lengths are included in the scope
torsion tests in which specimens are of delivery. The measuring device can be Required for operation
subjected to load until they fracture. The moved on the rigid frame to adapt to dif-
clean layout and simple operation mean ferent specimen lengths. 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz/CSA,
the experimental sequence can be ob- 1 phase
served in all details and phases.
Scope of delivery
In the experiment, metallic specimens Torsion test of metallic materials to fracture: Mt twisting moment, φ twisting angle, a speci-
are twisted until they are destroyed by a men fracture
1 experimental unit
typical shear fracture. 1 measuring amplifier
1 set of torsion specimens
1 GUNT software CD + USB cable
1 set of instructional material
Order number 020.50000
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
344 345
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Torsion test
WP 510 WP 510
Torsion test 200Nm, motor drive Torsion test 200Nm, motor drive
Specification
Technical data
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
346 347
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Fatigue of materials
WP 140 WP 140
Fatigue strength test Fatigue strength test
Specification
Technical data
1 protective cover, 2 electric motor, 3 switch box, 4 tool, 5 specimens, 6 bearing, Electric motor
7 clamped specimen, 8 load application device with spring balance and hand wheel
• speed: 2800min-1
• power: 0,37kW
Load force
• 0…300N
x
Electronic load counter
• 8-digit
• switchable to indicate speed
gunt gunt
Fatigue of materials
WP 600 WP 600
Creep rupture test Creep rupture test
Specification
Technical data
1 thermometer for temperature-controlled box, 2 storage element for cooling the speci- Specimens
men, 3 clamped specimen, 4 specimens, 5 weight, 6 adjustable stop for the lever, 7 lever,
8 dial gauge
• LxW: 25x5mm, thickness 2mm
• 10x lead
• 10x plastic (PE)
Weights
• 1x 1N (hanger)
• 2x 5N
• 3x 2N
• 3x 1N
• 2x 0,5N
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Measuring ranges
• typical phenomena of creep pro- Experiments can also be conducted be- • creep in specimens of various materi- • tension: 5…25N/mm2
cesses low room temperature by means of a als • displacement: 0…10mm, resolution 0,01mm
• experiments at or below room transparent temperature-controlled box • record a strain–time diagram (creep • temperature: -50…300°C
temperature are possible with storage elements. curve)
• influence of temperature and load on LxWxH: 700x350x510mm
Components that are subjected to long- In the experiment, the specimen is sub- the creep Weight: approx. 23kg
term constant loads deform plastically. jected to a constant tensile load at a giv- • load and recovery in plastics Principle of operation of the creep rupture test: 1 dial gauge, 2 specimen, 3 lever for load
en, constant temperature. The tensile transfer, 4 weight; F force, ε strain
This material behaviour is called creep. Scope of delivery
The creep rupture test is a destructive load is generated by a lever and stepped
weights. The specimen holders are
test method for determining the materi- 1 experimental unit
al behaviour (creep) at constant test equipped with knife-edge bearings to
avoid bending stresses on the specimen.
1 set of specimens
temperature (room temperature and 1 set of weights
below) and after prolonged exposure to An adjustable stop protects the dial
gauge at fracture of the specimen and 1 stopwatch
a constant load. 1 temperature-controlled box with 2 storage ele-
prevents the loads impacting the experi-
mental unit. ments and 1 thermometer
The WP 600 experimental unit demon-
strates typical phenomena such as
1 set of instructional material
phases of different creep rates or tem- The elongation of the specimen over
time is recorded by a dial gauge and a Order number 020.60000
perature-dependent creep behaviour.
The clean layout and simple operation stopwatch and represented in a
mean the experimental sequence can be strain–time diagram as the so-called
observed in all details and phases. Lead creep curve.
and plastic specimens are used in order
to achieve acceptable creep rates at
room temperature. Strain-time diagram (creep curve) of plastic: a load, b recovery, c elastic recovery,
d plastic recovery, e permanent deformation, ε strain, σ stress, t time
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
350 351
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
6 gunt
Materials testing
Tribology and corrosion
Tribology Corrosion
Tribology is the science and technology of interacting surfaces in contains all elements such as components and substances that Corrosion refers to the reaction of a metallic material to its environment, which causes a measurable change in the material.
relative motion. The application of tribology in engineering is used are involved in a tribological load, as well as their properties. This can lead to impairment of the function of a metal component or a whole system.
to study friction, wear and lubrication. These studies extend to Material components such as body, counter body, intermediate
all areas of development, engineering design, production and substance and ambient medium form the system structure. The The form of the material changes due to corrosion
maintenance of mechanical motion systems. Wear processes input variables and disturbance variables are summarised as
are analysed by means of a so-called tribological system and collective stresses.
are described by "systemic" loss variables. A tribological system Surface erosion, uniform erosion Pitting corrosion, crater-shaped Figure left and below: intergran-
of the workpiece surface or pinhole-like depressions that ular corrosion along the grain
undermine the surface boundaries.
Collective Structure of the tribological system Output variables Tribological system, repre Figure right: transgranular corro-
stresses • force sented using the example sion, transverse through the grains
• elements
of bolts/bearing shell
(1 body, 2 intermediate substance, • torque
Input variables 3 counter body, 4 ambient medium) • speed
• type of motion
• motion sequence
• material and geometric properties
• interaction between the elements
• mechanical !(¡{
3
energy
• load
• material
!(¡{
1
• velocities
• temperatures
variables !(¡{
4
F
• load duration
!(¡{
4
!(¡{
2
Disturbance v !(¡{
3
variables
• external mechani- !(¡{
2
cal vibrations
• radiation
!(¡{
1
Loss variables
1 body, Processes during corrosion
• friction • emissions 2 intermediate substance,
Technical function of • heat • wear 3 counter body, The environmental conditions of the material are significant (ion-conducting liquids). In metals, corrosion is caused primarily
the tribological system • vibrations • material erosion 4 ambient medium
for corrosion. Essentially, these are gases from the surround- by electrochemical or chemical processes.
ing atmosphere and liquids. Solutions can be electrolytes
In the analysis of tribological systems, loss variables such as
μ e-
FN FN FN coefficient of friction, frictional forces and frictional vibrations
are determined by suitable measuring methods. The change of e- e-
v v v
an input variable or disturbance variable can change the friction !(¡{
1 !(¡{
3 !(¡{
1 !(¡{
2 Cu++
Cu
and wear behaviour significantly. Experiments are required in
!(¡{
a !(¡{
b !(¡{
c order to investigate dependencies of loss variables.
Fe Fe++
The Stribeck curve gives a good overview of occurring friction +2e- Fe
Fe++
states, such as in slide bearings. The relationships between !(¡{
coefficient of friction, friction pressure and bearing force are
!(¡{
2 3
352 353
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 260 TM 260
Drive unit for tribological investigations Drive unit for tribological investigations
Specification
[1] base module with drive unit and display and control
unit for studying tribological phenomena
[2] horizontal or vertical position of the drive shaft by
means of pivotable motor block
[3] various experimental units available as accessories
[4] drive unit and experimental units secured by quick-
action chucks
[5] drive unit comprising DC motor with worm gear
[6] speed of the DC motor is continuously adjustable
[7] speed measured by incremental encoder
[8] frictional force measured by force sensor
[9] force and speed displayed on display and control
unit
1 motor and gear, 2 quick-action chuck, 3 drive shaft, 4 pivotable drive Technical data
DC motor
• rated speed: 3000min-1
• torque: 18,5Nm
Measuring ranges
• force: 0…50N
Description Learning objectives/experiments • speed: 0…200min-1
• base module for studying various The TM 260 units comprise a frame on • together with the experimental units LxWxH: 500x450x280mm (base module)
cases of sliding and rolling fric- which the drive unit is mounted together TM 260.01 to TM 260.06 Weight: approx. 10kg
tion with an experimental unit and a display · rolling friction of two disks with slip LxWxH: 360x330x170mm (display and control unit)
• contact force by means of and control unit. Quick-action chucks · elasto-hydrodynamic behaviour (EHD Weight: approx. 6kg
weights and lever make it quick and easy to assemble. The theory) in rolling friction of a sphere 1 TM 260.03 experimental unit studies a tribological system, consisting of a pin and disk,
• electronic measurement of the drive unit has a pivotable motor block against a flat surface which slide against each other, 2 TM 260 drive unit Required for operation
bearing. This allows the drive shaft to be · wear test: pin against disk
frictional force between friction installed horizontally or vertically. The · wear test: friction wheel experiment
partners 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz, 1 phase
speed of the DC motor is continuously · frictional vibrations and slip–stick
adjustable and is detected by means of phenomenon
Tribology studies friction, wear and lub- Scope of delivery
an incremental encoder. The frictional · pressure distribution in the journal
rication. Friction occurs when two solids forces are measured by a force sensor bearing
are in contact with each other and their 1 base module
in each experimental unit.
movement is impeded. If material is lost 1 display and control unit
progressively during this process, it is The display and control unit shows fric- 1 set of cables
referred to as wear. Lubricants are tional force and speed, the latter of 1 set of instructional material
used to minimise friction and wear. which can be adjusted continuously.
Order number 040.26000
The TM 260 drive unit, together with The following experiments can be con-
the experimental units TM 260.01 to ducted: rolling friction in friction wheels
TM 260.06, offer a complete course (TM 260.01), elasto-hydrodynamic be-
with a series of experiments to study tri- haviour (TM 260.02), dynamic friction in
bological phenomena. Various rolling a pin on a disk (TM 260.03), frictional vi-
and sliding cases can be demonstrated brations (TM 260.04), dynamic friction 1 TM 260.05 experimental unit studies a tribological system, consisting of a cylindrical pin
in the classroom or studied in the labor- in a cylindrical pin on a roller and a roller, which slide against each other (point contact), 2 TM 260 drive unit
atory. The parameters of a tribological (TM 260.05), pressure distribution in
system are recorded and analysed. A journal bearings (TM 260.06).
comprehensive range of friction pairings
makes it possible, among other things,
to represent how the frictional force is
independent of the contact area.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
354 355
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 260.01 TM 260.01
Rolling friction in friction wheels Rolling friction in friction wheels
Specification
Friction wheels
The illustration shows TM 260.01 on the TM 260 frame.
• D=49mm
• D=45mm, incl. rubber ring
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
356 357
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 260.02 TM 260.02
Elasto-hydrodynamic behaviour Elasto-hydrodynamic behaviour
• together with the drive unit [1] elasto-hydrodynamic behaviour of a lubricating film
· determine the thickness of the lub- layer between sphere and rotating glass plate
ricating film at the contact point of a [2] quick and easy assembly of the experimental unit
sphere with a plane surface – com- on the frame of the drive unit
pare with theoretical value [3] determine the thickness of the lubricating film by
· study the effect of load and speed on optical interference
the thickness of the lubricating film [4] glass plate is driven by a clampable coupling
between drive unit and gear unit
[5] hardened steel sphere, polished
[6] ground rotating glass plate with dielectric coating
[7] continuous load on the sphere via lever arm
[8] load measured by force sensor
[9] displays of force and speed and speed adjustment
on the drive unit
1 reflected light microscope, 2 halogen lamp, 3 steel sphere, 4 load application device,
5 cross table, 6 frame of TM 260, 7 drive unit from TM 260, 8 glass plate
Technical data
Sphere
• diameter: 25,4mm
• hardened steel, polished
Glass plate
• diameter: 150mm, ground
• coating: BK 7, dielectric, R=30%
Microscope
• magnification: x50
• halogen lamp: 10W
Determine the thickness of the lubricating film by optical interference: 1 halogen lamp,
2 glass plate with dielectric coating, 3 lubricating film, 4 steel sphere;
arrows orange: incident light, green: dielectric coating reflects 30% of the light, blue: steel
Force sensor: 0…50N
sphere reflects the remaining light
Description LxWxH: 350x250x550mm
Weight: approx. 8kg
• elasto-hydrodynamic behaviour To do this, the lubricating film between a The glass plate is driven by a clampable
between the sphere and rotating- sphere and a glass plate is determined coupling between drive unit and gear Scope of delivery
glass-plate friction pair and studied using a reflected-light micro- unit. The display and control unit of the
• investigation of the thickness and scope. The experimental unit contains a drive unit shows contact force and 1 experimental unit
shape of the lubricating film rotating glass plate and a steel sphere speed and allows the continuous adjust-
1 sphere
as the friction pair. The steel sphere is ment of the speed.
pressed against the glass plate from un-
1 glass plate
Elasto-hydrodynamic lubrication occurs 1 set of instructional material
derneath. The contact force between In the experiment, light waves from the
in roller bearings, gear wheels and cam
the friction partners can be adjusted reflected-light microscope pass through Order number 040.26002
followers, whose contact surfaces are
continuously by means of a lever. A lub- the glass plate and the lubricating film
subjected to high loads. These surfaces
ricating film is located between the and are reflected by the surface of the
are elastically deformed because of high
sphere and glass plate at the contact steel sphere. The light waves are refrac-
contact pressures. The theory of elasto-
point. The glass plate is parallel ground ted in the lubricating film, making colour
hydrodynamics (EHD theory) takes into
and dielectric coated. The surface of the interference fringes visible. The
consideration the elastic deformation of
hardened steel ball is polished. The re- wavelength of light increases or de-
the bodies in contact with each other
flected-light microscope stands on an creases with the variable thickness of Effect of lubricating film thickness on speed: 1 static case, 2 to 4 increase in lubricating film
and provides a basis for calculating the width (lubricating oil ISO VG 100)
adjustable xy cross table and has a fo- the lubricating film. The thickness of the
influence of lubrication on damage to
cus drive. lubricating film is determined visually by
gears and roller bearings.
means of the colour of the interference
The TM 260 drive unit is required in or- fringes created. The contact force is
The tribological system in TM 260.02 al-
der to conduct experiments. The experi- measured by a force sensor.
lows a clear representation of the elasto-
mental unit is mounted quickly and easily
hydrodynamic behaviour of lubricating
on the frame of the drive unit with quick-
film layers.
action chucks.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
358 359
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 260.03 TM 260.03
Dynamic friction in pin - disk Dynamic friction in pin - disk
Specification
Technical data
Disk
• D=50mm
• hardened stainless steel, ground
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Pin, DxH: 4x25mm
• frictional forces between two slid- Different lubrication conditions can be • together with the drive unit • 3x aluminium
ing friction pairs studied, such as dry friction, water or oil · frictional forces in different friction • 6x brass
• investigation of wear lubrication. Pins made of different ma- pairs and loads • 6x steel
• use of different lubricants pos- terials are included in the scope of deliv- · frictional forces with different lubric-
sible ery to study different friction pairings. ation Force sensor for frictional force
· frictional forces at different relative Tribological system pin and disk: 1 pin as counter body, 2 rotating disk as main body, 3 cup • 0…50N
The TM 260 drive unit is required in or- speeds of the friction partners with lubricant as intermediate substance, 4 contact area; F force, n speed
In bearing and drive technology, dynamic
der to conduct experiments. The experi- · wear under different friction para- Weights
friction occurs at the sliding and rolling
mental unit is mounted quickly and easily meters and lubrication conditions • 1x 5N (hanger)
points, which leads to power losses in
on the frame of the drive unit with quick- • 1x 20N
the technical systems. Dynamic friction
action chucks. The disk is driven by a • 1x 10N
is differentiated into sliding, rolling and
clampable coupling between drive unit • 1x 5N
spinning friction. In dynamic friction,
and gear unit. The display and control
there is relative translation between the
unit of the drive unit shows frictional
two bodies. LxWxH: 350x430x230mm
force and speed and allows the continu-
ous adjustment of the speed. Weight: approx. 8kg
The tribological system in TM 260.03 al-
lows a clear representation of the dy- Scope of delivery
The frictional force and the coefficient of
namic friction and an analysis of the fric-
friction can be determined in experi-
tional forces. The experimental unit con- 1 experimental unit
ments. The frictional forces are meas-
tains a fixed pin that is pressed axially 1 disk
ured by a force sensor. The wear can be
against a rotating disk as the friction 1 set of pins
determined precisely by measuring the
pair. The contact force between the fric-
change (reduction) in length of the pin. 1 set of weights
tion partners can be adjusted gradually
up to a maximum of 80 N by means of a 1 set of instructional material
Effect of the lubricating film on friction: 1 pin, 2 disk, 3 lubricant; a dry friction, b mixed fric-
lever. The rotating disk is enclosed by an tion, c fluid friction; FN force, v velocity
Order number 040.26003
open cup that can be filled with different
lubricants for the experiments.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
360 361
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 260.04 TM 260.04
Frictional vibrations Frictional vibrations
Specification
Technical data
1 force sensor, 2 frame of TM 260, 3 drive unit from TM 260, 4 rotating disk, 5 friction
ring, 6 weight, 7 spring and cable
Disk
• D: 60mm
• stainless steel
Friction ring
• D: 80mm
• d: 50mm
• 1x stainless steel
• 1x brass
• 1x plastic (PA)
Description Learning objectives/experiments
Force sensor for frictional force
• slip–stick phenomenon at the A tension spring prevents the friction • together with the drive unit • 0…50N
transition from static to dynamic ring from rotating. The necessary hold- · observation of the transition from
friction ing force is measured by a force sensor. static to dynamic friction Weights
• friction rings of different materi- · influence of lubrication on slip–stick • 1x 5N
als for the study of different fric- The TM 260 drive unit is required in or- phenomenon • 3x 10N
der to conduct experiments. The experi- · influence of the force between the Friction oscillations (Slip-stick phenomenon): 1 spring, 2 body, 3 drive; F force, v velocity,
tion pairings
mental unit is mounted quickly and easily friction partners on the slip–stick a static, b dynamic
Weight: approx. 7kg
on the frame of the drive unit with quick- phenomenon
Friction is the resistance of a body action chucks. The disk is driven by a · influence of the relative velocity of
against movement on a base. Static fric- clampable coupling between drive unit the friction partners on the Scope of delivery
tion means that a body remains at rest and gear unit. The display and control slip–stick phenomenon
under the action of a force. If a limit unit of the drive unit shows frictional 1 experimental unit
value is exceeded, the body begins to force and speed and allows the continu- 1 disk
move on the base, resulting in dynamic ous adjustment of the speed. 1 friction ring
friction. Self-excited friction oscillations, 1 spring
also known as slip–stick phenomenon, The frictional force and the coefficient of 1 set of weights
occur if the static friction is significantly friction can be determined in experi- 1 set of instructional material
higher than the dynamic friction. ments. The frictional forces are meas-
ured by a force sensor. Friction rings Order number 040.26004
The tribological system in TM 260.04 al- made of different materials are included
lows a clear demonstration of the trans- in the scope of delivery to study different
ition from static to dynamic friction and friction pairings.
the occurrence of friction oscillations.
The experimental unit contains a rotat-
ing stainless-steel disk and a loosely fit- Frictional force at static and dynamic friction: 1 static friction, 2 slide limit, 3 dynamic fric-
ting friction ring as the friction pair. The tion, FR frictional force, F traction, FH static frictional force, FG dynamic frictional force, a rest
state, b motion
contact force between the friction part-
ners can be adjusted gradually up to a
maximum of 40 N by means of weights.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
362 363
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 260.05 TM 260.05
Dynamic friction in cylindrical pin - roller Dynamic friction in cylindrical pin - roller
Specification
Technical data
Roller
• D=40mm
Description Learning objectives/experiments • hardened stainless steel, ground
• frictional forces between two slid- Different lubrication conditions can be • together with the drive unit Cylindrical pin, DxH: 10x20mm
ing friction pairs studied, such as dry friction, water or oil · frictional forces in different friction • 3x aluminium
• investigation of wear lubrication. Cylindrical pins made of dif- pairs and loads • 6x brass
• use of different lubricants pos- ferent materials are included in the · frictional forces with different lubric- • 6x steel
sible scope of delivery to study different fric- ation
tion pairings. · frictional forces at different relative Force sensor for frictional force
speeds of the friction partners Tribological system of cylindrical pin and roller (point contact): 1 fixed cylindrical pin as • 0…50N
In bearing and drive technology, dynamic counter body, 2 rotating roller as main body, 3 lubricant as intermediate substance; F force,
The TM 260 drive unit is required in or- · wear under different friction para-
friction occurs at the sliding and rolling n speed
der to conduct experiments. The experi- meters Weights
points, which leads to power losses in
mental unit is mounted quickly and easily • 1x 5N (hanger)
the technical systems. Dynamic friction
on the frame of the drive unit with quick- • 1x 20N
is differentiated into sliding, rolling and
action chucks. The roller is driven by a • 1x 10N
spinning friction. In dynamic friction,
clampable coupling between drive unit • 1x 5N
there is relative translation between the
and gear unit. The display and control
two bodies.
unit of the drive unit shows frictional
force and speed and allows the continu- LxWxH: 570x100x120mm
The tribological system in TM 260.05 al- Weight: approx. 8kg
ous adjustment of the speed.
lows a clear representation of the dy-
namic friction and an analysis of the fric- Scope of delivery
The frictional force and the coefficient of
tional forces. The experimental unit con-
friction can be determined in experi-
tains a fixed cylindrical pin that is 1 experimental unit
ments. The frictional forces are meas-
pressed radially against a rotating roller 1 roller
ured by a force sensor.
as the friction pair. There is point con- 1 set of cylindrical pins
tact between the friction partners. The
1 set of weights
contact force between the friction part-
ners can be adjusted gradually up to a 1 set of instructional material
maximum of 80 N by means of a lever. Order number 040.26005
The experimental unit includes a tank
that supplies lubricant.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
364 365
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 260.06 TM 260.06
Pressure distribution in journal bearings Pressure distribution in journal bearings
• together with the drive unit [1] demonstration and visualisation of the pressure dis-
· pressure distribution in the journal tribution in a journal bearing with hydrodynamic lub-
bearing depending on speed rication
· pressure distribution in the journal [2] quick and easy assembly of the experimental unit
bearing depending on load or bear- on the frame of the drive unit
ing gap width [3] roller is driven by a clampable coupling between
· stability limit as a function of the gap drive unit and gear unit
width [4] bearing housing is completely transparent
[5] moveable bearing housing, adjustable bearing gap
[6] 13 radial pressure measuring points on the bear-
ing shell
[7] radial pressure distribution indicated with 13 tube
manometers
[8] TM 260 base module required for operation
1 TM 260 base module, 2 bearing gap width adjustment, 3 oil pan, 4 shaft, 5 bearing hous-
ing with bearing shell, 6 tube manometers
Technical data
Shaft
• diameter: 50mm
• length: 50mm
• material: stainless steel
Bearing shell
• diameter: 52,5mm
• bearing gap adjustable from: 0…2,5mm
Oil
• ISO viscosity grade: VG 32
How adjustment of the bearing shell (bearing gap width) works: 1 bearing shell in right-hand Measuring ranges
position, 2 bearing shell in left-hand position
• pressure: 360mm oil column
• speed: 0…200min-1
Description
LxWxH: 350x150x450mm
• depiction of radial pressure dis- To this end, the experimental unit con- There are 13 measuring points around Weight: approx. 4kg
tribution in a journal bearing at tains an open bearing shell which only the circumference of the bearing shell
different bearing gap widths encloses a shaft half way and which sim- to measure the pressure. The pres- Scope of delivery
• bearing housing made of trans- ulates the journal bearing. The bearing sures are read off from a 13 tube mano-
parent plastic shell is secured to two spring plates in meters using the height of each column 1 experimental unit
such a way that it can be moved. Unlike of liquid. The lubricant is supplied via an
1 oil (0,5L)
real hydrodynamic journal bearings, the oil pan. The bearing shell is transparent,
The field of tribology covers all forms of
gap width can be adjusted via the radi- allowing close observation of the experi-
1 set of instructional materials
friction. Dry, mixed and fluid friction all
ally moveable bearing housing by means ment. Order number 040.26006
occur in journal bearings. Under operat-
of the spring plates and a micrometer
ing conditions there is completely dis-
screw.
tinct fluid friction, so that the shaft and
bearing shell are separated by a sup-
The TM 260 drive unit is required in or-
porting lubricating film. The supporting
der to conduct experiments. The experi- Pressure distribution over the bearing shell; pressure increases as the bearing gap de-
function of the lubricating film can be de-
mental unit is quickly and easily mounted creases
scribed by the pressure distribution in
on the frame of the drive unit with quick-
the bearing gap.
action chucks. The shaft is driven by a
clampable coupling between drive unit
The experimental unit TM 260.06 is
and gear unit. The display and control
used to visualise the radial pressure pro-
unit of the drive unit shows frictional
file in the journal bearing with hydro-
force and speed and allows the continu-
dynamic lubrication.
ous adjustment of the speed.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
366 367
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 232 TM 232
Bearing friction Bearing friction
• determine the frictional moment in [1] comparison of dynamic friction and rolling friction
slide bearings with various friction [2] experiments on rotational dynamics are possible
pairs [3] bearing shells of different materials as slide bear-
• determine the frictional moment of a ings
rolling bearing [4] steel flywheel, galvanised
• comparison of slide and rolling bear- [5] drive via cable drum and weights
ings [6] storage system for parts
• basic experiments on rotational dy- [7] bracket for wall mounting
namics
Technical data
Flywheel
• D=300mm
• weight: 22,2kg
Weights
• 1x 1N (hanger)
• 5x 1N
• 1x 2N
• 3x 5N
1 interchangeable bearing shells of cast iron, red bronze and plastic (PTFE), 2 roller bear-
ing; FN normal force, FR frictional force
Base plate
• LxW: 250x200mm
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
368 369
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 282 TM 282
Friction in journal bearings Friction in journal bearings
Specification
Technical data
Journal bearing
• shaft diameter: D=30mm
• bearing width: 45mm
• friction pair: steel/bronze
Motor: 0,37kW
Description Learning objectives/experiments Oil viscosity grade: ISO VG 32
• fundamentals of hydrodynamic The applied load is transmitted to the • develop an understanding of technolo- Weights
lubrication bearing housing through a load applica- gical relationships of hydrodynamic lub- • 1x 50N, 1x 20N, 2x 10N, 2x 5N, 2x 5N
• friction states under different op- tion device and can be varied by means rication by experimentation • lever transmission ratio: 5:1
erating conditions of weights. The frictional moment is de- • frictional moment in a journal bearing
• electronic speed control and di- termined by means of a movable weight as a function of Measuring ranges
that balances the moment on a balance · speed • temperature: -50…200°C
gital display of speed and lubric-
beam. The journal is driven by an electric · bearing load 1 journal bearing housing with shaft journal, 2 tare weight, 3 belt to transfer force to the
• speed: 100…3000min-1
ant temperature motor at a speed that can be adjusted · lubricant and lubricant temperature bearing housing, 4 loading lever, 5 weights, 6 measuring lever with scale and sliding weight,
7 drip oiler • bearing load: max. 525N
by a frequency converter. The temperat- • friction moment: max. 295Nmm
There a many factors that influence the ure (and therefore the viscosity) of the
friction states in a hydrodynamic journal lubricant is recorded by a temperature
bearing. Speed, load and viscosity of the sensor in the bearing shell and shown LxWxH: 610x440x360mm (experimental unit)
lubricant used are focused on in particu- on a screen on the display and control LxWxH: 360x340x160mm (display and control unit)
lar. unit. The lubricant is supplied via a wick Weight: approx. 40kg
oiler that applies the oil via two grooves
TM 282 allows the study of various in the bearing bush. The accumulated Required for operation
factors that influence friction. The journ- leakage oil is collected in a collecting
al bearing comprises an electrically driv- tank. 230V, 50/60Hz, 1 phase or 120V, 60Hz, 1 phase
en shaft journal that rotates in a freely
movable bearing housing. The move- Scope of delivery
ment of the oil in the bearing can be ob-
served. 1 experimental unit
1 display and control unit
1 set of weights
1 oil (0,5L)
Influence of the loading force F and the speed n on the frictional moment M 1 set of instructional material
Order number 040.28200
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
370 371
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 280 TM 280
Pressure distribution in journal bearings Pressure distribution in journal bearings
• visualisation and investigation of in- [1] visualisation and investigation of pressure distribu-
stability in journal bearings tion in journal bearings
• displacement of the shaft journal as a [2] bearing housing is completely transparent
function of the speed [3] continuously adjustable speed, electronically con-
• pressure distribution in the bearing un- trolled
der constant load and different speeds [4] bearing subjected to load by means of weights
• critical speed as a function of the load [5] temperature measurement in the bearing housing
• critical speed as a function of the oil [6] 12 measuring points on the periphery, 4 measur-
temperature ing points in the longitudinal direction
[7] pressure distribution indicated with 16 tube mano-
meters
[8] digital display of speed on the display and control
unit
1 tube manometers, 2 tank for oil, 3 weight, 4 display and control unit for speed control, Technical data
5 measuring hoses, 6 journal bearing with drive
Bearing
• nominal bearing diameter: 51mm
• bearing gap width: 4mm
• bearing width: 75mm
• bearing load: 6,7…16,7N
Motor
• power: 0,37kW
• max. speed: 3000min-1
Weights
• 1x 1N (hanger)
1 measuring points, 2 transparent bearing housing, 3 journal, 4 measuring point, 5 weight, • 2x 2N
6 anti-twist device, 7 bellows, 8 drive motor, 9 radial sealing ring
• 1x 5N
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
372 373
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 01.2017 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 01.2017
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
TM 290 TM 290
Journal bearing with hydrodynamic lubrication Journal bearing with hydrodynamic lubrication
• determine the coefficients of friction at [1] friction states in hydrodynamically lubricated journal
various loads and speeds, compare bearing
with Stribeck curves [2] 5 shafts with different diameters for experiments
• influence of speed, bearing clearance with different bearing clearances
and bearing load on the displacement [3] shaft driven by three-phase motor with frequency
of the shaft converter for continuous adjustment of the speed
• influence of speed, bearing clearance, [4] radial load of the bearing by means of compression
bearing load and lubricant on the fric- spring and threaded spindle with handwheel and
tional moment measured via force sensor
• locus of the shaft [5] determine the frictional moment by means of lever
arm with force sensor
[6] 8 inductive displacement sensors for measuring
the displacement of the shaft
[7] digital displays for radial load, frictional moment, po-
1 handwheel for load, 2 transparent protective cover, 3 oil pressure line, 4 force sensor for sition of the shaft (X and Y direction), oil pressure,
frictional moment, 5 shaft, 6 bearing housing with inductive displacement sensors, 7 dis- peak oil pressure, oil temperature and speed
plays and controls
Technical data
Journal bearing
• rated diameter of the shaft: 50mm
• radial load: 0…500N
• bearing clearance: 0,12mm; 0,14mm; 0,16mm;
0,18mm; 0,28mm
Measuring ranges
• frictional moment: 0…10Nm
• radial load: 0…900N
• displacement in X direction: ±1,000mm
Sectional views of the journal bearing: 1 bearing shell, 2 shaft, 3 bearing housing, 4 dis- • displacement in Y direction: ±1,000mm
placement sensors (4 in X direction, 4 in Y direction), 5 oil supply; F load • oil pressure: 1x 0…10bar, 1x 0…16bar
Description • oil temperature: 0…100°C
• speed: 0…1750min-1
• frictional moment under different The TM 290 trainer allows the study of Inductive sensors detect the relative mo-
bearing clearances and loads a hydrodynamically lubricated radial tion of the shaft in the bearing. This LxWxH: 1000x750x1650mm
• pressure distribution in the journ- journal bearing. Five shafts with different measurement makes it possible to plot Weight: approx. 170kg
al bearing diameters allow the operating behaviour a locus of the shaft as a function of load
• locus of the shaft under different to be analysed as a function of the bear- and speed. The position is measured, av- Required for operation
ing clearance. eraged and displayed at four points on
loads and speeds
the shaft in each of the X and Y direc- 230V, 50Hz, 1 phase
The radial load on the journal bearing is tions.
In hydrodynamic bearings, the shaft and applied by means of a handwheel and
the bearing shell are separated from
Scope of delivery
measured electronically. Similarly, the Oil temperature, oil pressure and oil
each other during operation by a sup- frictional moment is measured using a peak pressure in the bearing are meas- 1 trainer
porting lubricating film. The pressure in force sensor. The shaft is driven by a ured and displayed by additional
the lubricating film in hydrodynamic 1 set of tools
three-phase motor. The speed is con- sensors. 1 oil (5L)
journal bearings is generated by the rel- tinuously adjustable via a frequency con-
ative motion between bearing shell and 1 set of instructional material
verter and is displayed digitally. Movement of the shaft centre point during operation or startup behaviour, blue: theoretical
shaft. The position of the shaft in rela- semicircle curve, red: measuring results of TM 290; δ relative lubricating film thickness Order number 040.29000
tion to the speed and the load is import-
ant for an analysis of the tribological pro-
cess in the bearing shell of a journal
bearing.
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
374 375
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/2 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/2 - 12.2016
6 gunt
Materials testing
gunt gunt
Tribology and corrosion
CE 105 CE 105
Corrosion of metals Corrosion of metals
Specification
1 electrical connecting sockets, 2 electrolyte vessel with specimens and specimen holders Technical data
(clamps), 3 electrolyte vessel with specimen holders (hooks), 4 flow control valves, 5 gas
supply, 6 power pack, 7 diaphragm pump switch, 8 air / external gas supply reversing valve
Electrolyte vessels
• capacity: 1000mL
• material: glass
Power pack
• voltage: 0…30VDC
• current: 0…5A
G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de G.U.N.T. Gerätebau GmbH, Hanskampring 15-17, D-22885 Barsbüttel, Telefon (040) 67 08 54-0, Fax (040) 67 08 54-42, Email sales@gunt.de, Web www.gunt.de
376 377
We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 1/3 - 12.2016 We reserve the right to modify our products without any notifications. Page 2/3 - 12.2016
gunt
The complete GUNT programme –
equipment for engineering education
Engineering
mechanics and
Mechatronics Thermal engineering,
refrigeration and
Fluid mechanics Process engineering
2E345
engineering design HVAC Energy & environment
• Waste
Eq uip me
nt
fo r En gin
ee rin g
Ed uc at
ion
EntireBrief Overview
ple
ma com
me
Sumario
GUNT –
Your pa
rtner for
efficient
technolo
gy educ
ation
378 379
Index
gunt
Index
Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page)
A breakaway torque of screws TM 320 (277) Cremona diagram SE 130 (42) SE 130.01 (44) E
absorber effect TM 150 (178) TM 182 (210) bridge connection (strain gauge) FL 100 (122) critical speed PT 500.10 (232) eccentrically loaded compression struts WP 120 (110)
abutment line SE 110.17 (50) Brinell hardness test MT 190 (310) WP 300 (332) PT 500.14 (240) efficiency of gears AT 200 (296) GL 210 (158)
WP 310 (334) TM 620 (196) TM 625 (198) GL 212 (160) TM 123 (282)
Ackermann steering principle KI 160 (151)
buckling SE 110.19 (104) SE 110.57 (106) cupping test WP 300 (332) WP 310 (334) elastic line FL 160 (114) SE 110.14 (82)
alignment MT 172 (308) PT 500 (224)
WP 120 (110) WP 121 (108) curved beam FL 170 (94) SE 110.20 (92) SE 110.44 (96)
alignment error PT 500 (224) PT 500.10 (232) SE 110.47 (86) WP 100 (90)
PT 500.13 (238) buckling force SE 110.19 (104) WP 120 (110) cylindrical workpieces TZ 100 (258)
WP 121 (108) WP 950 (84) WP 962 (33)
alternating torque PT 500.16 (244) elastic shaft PT 500.10 (232)
buckling stress SE 110.19 (104) WP 120 (110)
amplitude response TM 155 (188) WP 121 (108) elastohydrodynamics (EHD theory) TM 260.02 (358)
apparent force TM 605 (166) D
electromechanical vibrations PT 500.19 (250)
arch SE 110.16 (52) damage analysis PT 500 (224)
elevation curve of cam mechanisms GL 110 (281) GL 112 (208)
articulated beam SE 110.12 (48) C damage to gears PT 500.15 (242)
energy methods SE 110.44 (96)
assembly process MT 110.02 (306) MT 152 (304) cable friction TM 220 (74/286) damage to rolling bearings PT 500.12 (236)
PT 501 (220) engineering drawing TZ 100 (258) TZ 200.02 (262)
MT 170 (300) MT 171 (302) cable under constant line load SE 110.18 (46) TZ 200.08 (263) TZ 200.11 (266)
MT 190 (310) TZ 200.11 (266) damped vibration TM 150 (178) TM 155 (188) TZ 200.61 (260) TZ 200.71 (268)
TZ 200.71 (268) TZ 300 (264) cable under dead weight SE 110.50 (34)
deflection of a spring, elastic TM 110.01 (18) TZ 300 (264)
asymmetric arch SE 110.17 (50) cable under point load SE 110.50 (34)
deflections of beams SE 110.47 (86) envelope analysis PT 500.12 (236) PT 500.16 (244)
axial run-out PT 500.13 (238) cable winch TM 125 (284) WP 100 (90) PT 501 (220)
axial second moment of area FL 160 (114) cam box GL 430 (292) WP 950 (84) WP 960 (30) equilibrium conditions of statics SE 110.53 (24)
cam mechanism GL 110 (281) GL 112 (208) WP 961 (32) WP 962 (33)
axial stress FL 130 (132) FL 140 (134) equilibrium of a rigid body SE 110.53 (24)
cantilever beam SE 110.14 (82) SE 110.47 (86) deformation energy SE 110.44 (96)
equilibrium of forces TM 110 (16) TM 110.01 (18)
WP 100 (90) WP 950 (84) deformation in tension FL 100 (122) TM 225 (73)
cardan error KI 150 (150) deformation in torsion SE 110.29 (88) equilibrium of moments EM 049 (23) TM 110 (16)
B WP 100 (90)
Castigliano SE 110.44 (96) TM 121 (26) TM 122 (27)
backlash PT 500.15 (242) PT 500.16 (244) deformation of a bar WP 100 (90)
catenary SE 110.18 (46) SE 110.50 (34) Euler‘s buckling formula SE 110.57 (106) WP 120 (110)
balancing PT 500 (224) PT 502 (204) deformation of a beam WP 100 (90) WP 121 (108)
TM 170 (202) cavitation in pumps PT 500.17 (246)
centre distance (gears) PT 500.15 (242) deformation of a beam with a FL 170 (94) Eytelwein‘s belt friction formula TM 220 (74/286)
bar-type oscillator TM 150 (178) curved axis
beam theory FL 160 (114) SE 110.14 (82) centre of gravity TM 161 (172)
deformation of a frame SE 110.20 (92)
SE 110.47 (86) WP 100 (90) centre of inertia TM 161 (172)
WP 950 (84) deformation of a parabolic arch SE 110.16 (52) F
centrifugal force TM 600 (162) TM 632 (168)
beam, curved FL 170 (94) deformation of a straight beam FL 100 (122) FL 102 (124) fatigue fracture PT 500.11 (234)
centrifugal governor TM 632 (168) SE 110.47 (86)
bearing clearance MT 170 (300) PT 500.16 (244) chain gear GL 410 (288) GL 420 (290) WP 950 (84) fatigue strength test WP 140 (348)
TM 290 (374) FFT analysis PT 500.04 (228)
change gear train GL 430 (292) deformation of a truss SE 110.44 (96)
bearing condition PT 501 (220) field balancing PT 500 (224) PT 500.10 (232)
Charpy notched bar impact test WP 400 (340) WP 410 (342) descriptive geometry TZ 100 (258)
bearing damage PT 500.12 (236) PT 500.15 (242) PT 502 (204)
PT 501 (220) circular beam FL 170 (94) determine modulus of elasticity FL 100 (122)
WP 100 (90) first-order elasticity theory (trusses) SE 110.20 (92)
bearing elements, machine elements MG 911 (279) MT 170 (300) coefficient of friction TM 110.01 (18) TM 200 (72)
TM 210 (70) TM 225 (73) WP 120 (110) flat belt TM 220 (74/286)
MT 171 (302)
TM 232 (368) TM 260.01 (356) determining bar forces FL 111 (22) flexibility method FL 170 (94) WP 950 (84)
bearing friction TM 232 (368) TM 282 (370) TM 260.03 (360) TM 260.04 (362) SE 110.21 (38) flywheel TM 232 (368) TM 612 (156)
bearing vibrations PT 500 (224) TM 260.05 (364) TM 290 (374) SE 110.22 (40)
TM 310 (278) SE 110.44 (96) force transmission TM 110.02 (19) TM 122 (27)
bearing, hydrodynamic TM 282 (370) MT 171 (302) TM 125 (284)
combined load FL 160 (114) SE 130 (42)
belt drive GL 100 (280) GL 410 (288) TM 115 (21) forced vibration TM 140 (192) TM 150 (178)
GL 420 (290) GL 430 (292) commutative theories SE 110.14 (82) WP 950 (84) TM 155 (188)
TM 220 (74/286) PT 500.14 (240) diffraction angle (universal joint) KI 150 (150)
composite stress FL 160 (114) WP 130 (116) forces at a section on a beam WP 960 (30) WP 961 (32)
belt friction TM 220 (74/286) dimensioning MT 110.02 (306) MT 152 (304)
composition of forces TM 110 (16) TM 115 (21) TZ 200.02 (262) WP 962 (33)
belt tension PT 500.14 (240) compression struts with various SE 110.19 (104) WP 120 (110) TZ 200.08 (263) forces at a section on a frame SE 110.20 (92)
bend test FL 100 (122) SE 100 (336) support methods WP 121 (108) TZ 200.11 (266) forces at a section: normal force, WP 960 (30) WP 961 (32)
SE 110.14 (82) SE 110.47 (86) compression test SE 100 (336) WP 300 (332) TZ 200.61 (260) shear force, bending moment WP 962 (33)
SE 110.48 (338) WP 100 (90) WP 310 (334) TZ 200.71 (268)
WP 300 (332) WP 310 (334) TZ 300 (264) forces with a common point of action TM 110 (16)
connecting elements, MG 901 (274) MG 903 (275) four-joint link KI 130 (148)
bending and torsion FL 160 (114) WP 100 (90) machine elements MG 905 (276) TM 320 (277) direct stress FL 140 (134) WP 130 (116)
WP 130 (116) TM 310 (278) direction of principal stress FL 120 (130) FL 130 (132) fracture behaviour WP 400 (340) WP 410 (342)
bending beam FL 160 (114) SE 110.58 (181) contact area TM 262 (98) FL 140 (134) frame, deformation SE 110.20 (92)
bending deformation of a beam FL 160 (114) contact force TM 262 (98) disk cam GL 110 (281) free vibration SE 110.58 (181) TM 155 (188)
with L-profile cross-section double crank KI 130 (148) free-body diagram SE 110.21 (38) SE 110.22 (40)
control gear GL 430 (292)
bending deformation of a beam FL 160 (114) double rocker mechanism KI 130 (148) SE 110.53 (24) SE 130 (42)
with U-profile cross-section Coriolis force TM 605 (166)
drive belt TM 170 (202) TM 220 (74/286) frequency spectra PT 500 (224)
bending deformation of a curved beam FL 170 (94) correlation between damage PT 500.12 (236)
and running noise drive systems GL 410 (288) GL 420 (290) friction TM 110.01 (18) TM 200 (72)
bending deformation of a FL 100 (122) FL 102 (124) GL 430 (292) TM 210 (70) TM 220 (74/286)
straight beam SE 110.47 (86) WP 100 (90) corrosion CE 105 (376) TM 225 (73)
WP 950 (84) coupling vibration PT 500.13 (238) dual belt PT 500.14 (240)
friction gear GL 100 (280)
bending moment diagram WP 960 (30) WP 962 (33) crack identification PT 500.11 (234) dynamic friction TM 110.01 (18)
TM 200 (72) friction oscillation TM 260.04 (362)
bending vibration SE 110.58 (181) PT 500.10 (232) crack in the shaft PT 500.11 (234) TM 210 (70) friction wheels TM 260.01 (356)
TM 620 (196) crane boom TM 115 (21) TM 225 (73) friction, roller bearing TM 232 (368)
Bernoulli hypothesis FL 160 (114) crank mechanism KI 110 (146) KI 120 (147) TM 232 (368)
TM 260.01 (356) friction, slide bearing TM 232 (368) TM 282 (370)
bevel gear GL 300.02 (269) GL 410 (288) KI 140 (149) PT 500.16 (244)
GL 420 (290) TM 180 (206) TM 260.03 (360) frictional force TM 200 (72) TM 210 (70)
TM 260.04 (362) TM 260.01 (356) TM 260.03 (360)
biaxial bending FL 160 (114) crank offset TM 180 (206) TM 260.05 (364) TM 260.04 (362) TM 260.05 (364)
biaxial stress state FL 130 (132) crank slider KI 120 (147) KI 140 (149) dynamic fundamental law of TM 612 (156) frictional forces on journal bearings TM 232 (368)
blade oscillation PT 500.18 (248) crank-rocker mechanism KI 130 (148) rotational movement fundamental equation of SE 110.47 (86) WP 950 (84)
blade pass frequency PT 500.18 (248) creep rupture test WP 600 (350) dynamic imbalance PT 500 (224) straight bending
380 381
Index
gunt
Index
Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page)
382 383
Index
gunt
Index
Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page) Keyword Code (page)
384 385
Product overview
gunt
Product overview
AT MT TM TZ
AT 200 Determination of gear efficiency 296 MT 110.02 Assembly spur wheel / worm gear mechanism 306 TM 110 Fundamentals of statics 16 TZ 100 Engineering drawing: three-dimensional display 258
MT 152 Assembly spur gear 304 TM 110.01 Supplementary set – inclined plane and friction 18 TZ 200.02 Engineering drawing: casting 262
CE MT 170 Assembly shaft with journal bearings 300 TM 110.02 Supplementary set – pulley blocks 19 TZ 200.08 Engineering drawing: safety catch 263
CE 105 Corrosion of metals 376 MT 171 Assembly hydrodynamic journal bearing 302 TM 110.03 Supplementary set – gear wheels 20 TZ 200.11 Assembly of bending device 266
MT 172 Alignment of drives, shafts and gears 308 TM 115 Forces in a crane jib 21 TZ 200.61 Engineering drawing:
EM MT 190 Assembly materials tester 310 TM 121 Equilibrium of moments on pulleys 26 rotationally symmetrical components 260
EM 049 Equilibrium of moments on a two-arm lever 23 MT 190.01 Assembly data acquisition for materials tester 312 TM 122 Equilibrium of moments on a differential pulley block 27 TZ 200.71 Assembly of lever shears 268
TM 123 Spur gear unit 282 TZ 300 Assembly of lever press 264
FL PT TM 124 Worm gear unit 283
FL 100 Strain gauge training system 122 PT 500 Machinery diagnostic system, base unit 224 TM 125 Cable winch 284 WP
FL 101 Strain gauge application set 120 PT 500.01 Laboratory trolley 227 TM 140 Rotational vibrations 192 WP 100 Deformation of bars under bending or torsion 90
FL 102 Determining the gauge factor of strain gauges 124 PT 500.04 Computerised vibration analyser 228 TM 150 Vibration trainer 178 WP 120 Buckling behaviour of bars 110
FL 111 Forces in a simple bar structure 22 PT 500.05 Brake & load unit 230 TM 150.02 Free and damped torsional vibrations 190 WP 121 Demonstration of Euler buckling 108
FL 120 Stress and strain analysis on a membrane 130 PT 500.10 Elastic shaft kit 232 TM 150.20 System for data acquisition 180 WP 130 Verification of stress hypotheses 116
FL 130 Stress and strain analysis on a thin-walled cylinder 132 PT 500.11 Crack detection in rotating shaft kit 234 TM 155 Free and forced vibrations 188 WP 140 Fatigue strength test 348
FL 140 Stress and strain analysis on a thick-walled cylinder 134 PT 500.12 Roller bearing faults kit 236 TM 155.20 System for data acquisition 191 WP 300 Materials testing, 20kN 332
FL 152 Multi-channel measuring amplifier 56/128 PT 500.13 Couplings kit 238 TM 161 Rod and gravity pendulum 172 WP 310 Materials testing, 50kN 334
FL 160 Unsymmetrical bending 114 PT 500.14 Belt drive kit 240 TM 162 Bifilar / trifilar suspension of pendulums 173 WP 400 Impact test, 25Nm 340
FL 170 Deformation of curved-axis beams 94 PT 500.15 Damage to gears kit 242 TM 163 Torsional vibrations 174 WP 410 Impact test, 300Nm 342
FL 200 Photoelastic experiments with a transmission polariscope 136 PT 500.16 Crank mechanism kit 244 TM 164 Coil spring vibrations 175 WP 500 Torsion test, 30Nm 344
FL 210 Photoelastic demonstration 138 PT 500.17 Cavitation in pumps kit 246 TM 170 Balancing apparatus 202 WP 510 Torsion test 200Nm, motor drive 346
PT 500.18 Vibrations in fans kit 248 TM 180 Forces at reciprocating engines 206 WP 600 Creep rupture test 350
GL PT 500.19 Electromechanical vibrations kit 250 TM 182 Vibrations on machine foundations 210 WP 950 Deformation of straight beams 84
GL 100 Principle of gear units 280 PT 501 Roller bearing faults 220 TM 182.01 Piston compressor for TM 182 212 WP 960 Beam on two supports:
GL 105 Kinematic model: gear drive 152 PT 502 Field balancing 204 TM 200 Fundamentals of mechanical friction 72 shear force & bending moment diagrams 30
GL 110 Cam mechanism 281 TM 210 Dry friction 70 WP 961 Beam on two supports: shear force diagram 32
GL 112 Investigation of cam mechanisms 208 SE TM 220 Belt drive and belt friction 74/286 WP 962 Beam on two supports: bending moment diagram 33
GL 200 Lathe gearing mechanism 294 SE 100 Frame for load testing, 400kN 336 TM 225 Friction on the inclined plane 73
GL 210 Dynamic behaviour of multistage spur gears 158 SE 110.12 Lines of influence on the Gerber beam 48 TM 232 Bearing friction 368
GL 212 Dynamic behaviour of multistage planetary gears 160 SE 110.14 Elastic line of a beam 82 TM 260 Drive unit for tribological investigations 354
GL 300.01− Cutaway models 270 SE 110.16 Parabolic arch 52 TM 260.01 Rolling friction in friction wheels 356
GL 300.12 271 SE 110.17 Three-hinged arch 50 TM 260.02 Elasto-hydrodynamic behaviour 358
GL 410 Assembly simple drives 288 SE 110.18 Forces on a suspension bridge 46 TM 260.03 Dynamic friction in pin – disk 360
GL 420 Assembly combined drives 290 SE 110.19 Investigation of simple stability problems 104 TM 260.04 Frictional vibrations 362
GL 430 Assembly step and shift gears 292 SE 110.20 Deformation of frames 92 TM 260.05 Dynamic friction in cylindrical pin – roller 364
SE 110.21 Forces in various single plane trusses 38 TM 260.06 Pressure distribution in journal bearings 366
HM SE 110.22 Forces in an overdeterminate truss 40 TM 262 Hertzian pressure 98
HM 159.11 Natural vibration on a ship model 194 SE 110.29 Torsion of bars 88 TM 280 Pressure distribution in journal bearings 372
SE 110.44 Deformation of trusses 96 TM 282 Friction in journal bearings 370
KI SE 110.47 Methods to determine the elastic line 86 TM 290 Journal bearing with hydrodynamic lubrication 374
KI 110 Kinematic model: crank mechanism 146 SE 110.48 Bending test, plastic deformation 338 TM 310 Thread testing 278
KI 120 Kinematic model: crank slider 147 SE 110.50 Cable under dead-weight 34 TM 320 Screw connections testing 277
KI 130 Kinematic model: four-joint link 148 SE 110.53 Equilibrium in a single plane, TM 400 Hooke’s law 100
KI 140 Kinematic model: Whitworth quick return mechanism 149 statically determinate system 24 TM 600 Centrifugal force 162
KI 150 Kinematic model: Hooke‘s coupling 150 SE 110.57 Buckling of bars 106 TM 605 Coriolis force 166
KI 160 Kinematic model: Ackermann steering mechanism 151 SE 110.58 Free vibrations in a bending beam 181 TM 610 Rotational inertia 154
SE 112 Mounting frame 58/101 TM 611 Rolling disk on inclined plane 155
MG SE 130 Forces in a Howe truss 42 TM 612 Kinetic model: flywheel 156
MG 901 Nuts and bolts kit 274 SE 130.01 Truss beam: Warren girder 44 TM 620 Bending elasticity in rotors 196
MG 903 Screw-locking devices kit 275 TM 620.20 System for data acquisition 200
MG 905 Thread types kit 276 TM 625 Elastic shafts 198
MG 911 Roller bearings kit 279 TM 630 Gyroscope 164
TM 632 Centrifugal governor 168
386 387
Contact
G. U. N.T. Gerätebau GmbH
Hanskampring 15 – 17
D-22885 Barsbüttel
Germany
Tel. +49 (0)40 67 08 54-0
Fax +49 (0)40 67 08 54-42 Visit our website
Email sales@gunt.de www.gunt.de
Web www.gunt.de